Schneider Electric Software PLC Application-Specific Functions, Micro/Junior/Pro, 4.5 User Guide
Hirdetés
Hirdetés
PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro
Modicon Micro PLC Applications
Applications Base
eng March 2005
2
Table of Contents
About the book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Part I
Shared application-specific functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Chapter 1
Common application specific functions: General . . . . . . . . . . 17
Chapter 2
Objects associated with specific applications . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.1
Addressing of language objects associated with specific applications . . . . . . . . 26
Addressing of built-in application-specific interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Addressing in-rack Input/Output module objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Addressing of language objects associated with AS-i bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.2
2.3
WRITE_CMD: Writing command words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
READ_PARAM: Reading adjustment parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
WRITE_PARAM: Writing adjustment parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
SAVE_PARAM: Saving adjustment parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
RESTORE_PARAM: Restoring adjustment parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.4
Automatic symbolization of objects associated with a channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3
4
Chapter 3
Application-specific instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Accessing a specific function, method or procedure type instruction . . . . . . . . . 53
Chapter 4
Appendices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Reminders concerning the configuration editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Application-specific fault processing (in-rack modules) by program . . . . . . . . . . 62
Part II
Discrete application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Chapter 5 General introduction to the discrete application -specific
function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Chapter 6
Discrete application configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
6.1
Description of the configuration screen for a discrete module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
How to access the configuration parameters of a discrete module. . . . . . . . . . . 71
Modifying the configuration parameters of a discrete module's: General . . . . . . 73
6.2
6.3
How to modify the Task parameter of a discrete module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
How to modify the Monitoring the external supply parameter for a discrete module
How to modify the Functions parameter of a discrete module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
How to modify the Type of inputs parameter of a discrete module . . . . . . . . . . . 85
How to modify the Network frequency parameter of a discrete module . . . . . . . 86
How to modify the Filtering time parameter for 24 DCV inputs of a discrete module
How to modify the Fallback mode parameter of a discrete module . . . . . . . . . . . 88
How to modify the Reactivation of outputs parameter of a discrete module.. . . . 89
How to parameterize the RUN/STOP input of a discrete module . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
How to parameterize the save program and %MW input of a discrete module . 91
How to parameterize the alarm output of a discrete module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Chapter 7
Debugging discrete modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Introduction to the debug function of a discrete module.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Description of the debug screen for a discrete module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
How to access the channels debug screen of a discrete module. . . . . . . . . . . . 97
How to access the Diagnostics function for a discrete module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
How to access the SET and RESET commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
How to access the reactivation of outputs command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Chapter 8 Bits and words associated with discrete specific applications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
8.1
Addressing discrete input/output module objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
8.2
Language objects associated with the discrete specific application . . . . . . . . . 105
Exchange management: Module %MWx.MOD.0:Xj or channel %MWx.i.0:Xj
Exchange management: Module %MWx.MOD.1:Xj or channel %MWx.i.1:Xj report
Explicit exchange objects: Status Module %MWx.MOD.2:Xj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Explicit exchange object: Command Word %MWxMOD.3:Xj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Part III
AS-i Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Chapter 9
General introduction to the AS-i Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
How to declare an AS-i communication module in the PLC rack . . . . . . . . . . . 121
How to access the AS-i Bus configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Chapter 10
AS-i bus configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Description of the configuration screen for an AS-i communication module . . . 124
How to define a slave device on the AS-i bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5
6
How to modify the software configuration of the AS-i Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
How to access the description of an AS-i slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
How to define a new slave profile in the standard AS-I catalogue. . . . . . . . . . . 130
How to modify AS-i slave general parameters: Automatic addressing . . . . . . . 132
How to modify AS-i slave general parameters: Fallback mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Chapter 11
Debugging the AS-i bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Description of the debug screen for an AS-i module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
How to access functionality in the module diagnostics and channel diagnostics for
How to access adjustment of an AS-i device’s parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
How to access the AS-i channels’ forcing/unforcing function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
How to access the SET and RESET commands of the AS-i channels . . . . . . . 144
Automatic replacement of a faulty AS-i slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
How to insert a slave device into an existing AS-i configuration.. . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Chapter 12
Bits and words associated with the AS-i function . . . . . . . . 147
12.1
Addressing objects associated with the AS-i function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Addressing language objects associated with slave devices connected on the AS-i
12.2
Language objects associated with the AS-i function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Implicit exchange objects associated with the AS-i function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Managing exchanges: Module %MW4.MOD.0:Xj or channel %MW4.0.0:Xj
Managing exchanges: Module %MW4.MOD.1:Xj or channel %MW4.0.1:Xj report
Explicit exchange objects: Channel status %MW4.0.2:Xj to %MW4.0.22:Xj . . . 154
Explicit exchange object: Channel command %MW4.0.23:Xj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Explicit exchange objects: Adjustment parameters %MW4.0.24 to %MW4.0.39157
Explicit exchange objects: Status %MW4.MOD.2:Xj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Chapter 13
AS-i operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Chapter 14
AS-i performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Part IV
Analog application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Chapter 15
The analog application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Introduction to the analog application on Micro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Chapter 16
Built-in analog interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
16.1
16.2
16.3
Chapter 17
Analog input modules TSX AEZ 801 / TSX AEZ 802 . . . . . . . 181
Introduction to the TSX AEZ 801/TSX AEZ 802 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Range selection and input overflow monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
What happens to the module in the event of an overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Chapter 18
Analog input modules TSX AEZ 414. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Range selection and input overshoot monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
What happens to the module in the event of an overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Chapter 19
Analog output module TSX ASZ 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Chapter 20
Analog output module TSX ASZ 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
7
8
Chapter 21
TSX AMZ 600 Analog Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Introduction to the TSX AMZ 600 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Selection of Ranges and Monitoring of Input Overshoots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Monitoring of Sensor Link on TSX AMZ 600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Chapter 22
Configuring the analog application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
22.1
22.2
Accessing the analog application parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Accessing Parameterization of the Integrated Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Accessing Parameterization of an Analog Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Chapter 23
Configuration of analog channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
23.1
23.2
Modification of the Task Assigned to the Module Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
23.3
Modifying an output channel’s parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Modifying the task to which the output is assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Modification of the Output Range (TSX ASZ 200 and TSX AMZ 600) . . . . . . . 251
Chapter 24
Debugging function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Chapter 25
Bits and words associated with the analog application . . . . 265
Implicit exchange objects associated with the analog application. . . . . . . . . . . 266
Explicit exchange objects associated with inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Configuration objects associated with the analog application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Part V
Operator Dialog functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Chapter 26
General presentation of the Operator Dialog functions . . . . 273
Chapter 27
Built-in DOP functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
27.1
Description of the parameters common to the different DOP functions . . . . . . 276
27.2
9
10
Chapter 28
Appendices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
28.1
28.2
Description of the built-in DOP functions "Data to send" parameter coding . . . 331
PLC status message display: SEND_MSG function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
PLC checked status message entry: ASK_MSG and GET_MSG function . . . . 336
PLC alarm message display: SEND_ALARM function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Display of status, alarm or a group of messages contained in the CCX 17 memory:
ASK_VALUE, DISPLAY_MSG, GET_VALUE, DISPLAY_ALRM and
Display of luminous column LEDS: CONTROL_LEDS function . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Configuring command keys: ASSIGN_KEYS function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Generic send command: PANEL_CMD function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Part VI
Process control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Chapter 29
General on the PID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Development methodology of a regulation application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Chapter 30
Description of the regulation functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Performance of the functions in the operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Chapter 31
Operator dialogue on CCX 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Performance of the PID_MMI function according to the PLC and CCX 17’s operating
Chapter 32
Example of application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Chapter 33
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Glossary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
11
12
About the book
At a Glance
Document Scope This manual describes the software installation for the applications (excluding communication applications) on TSX 37 using PL7 software.
Validity Note The updating of this publication takes into account the functionalities of PL7 V4.5.
However it enables the installation of previous versions of PL7.
Related
Documents
Title of Documentation
Hardware installation manual
Reference Number
TSX DM 37 50 E
User Comments We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at [email protected]
13
About the book
14
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Shared application-specific functions
I
Presentation
Aim of this part
What's in this part?
This part gives a general overview of the acknowledgment of specific applications by the PL7 software.
This Part contains the following Chapters:
Chapter
1
2
3
4
Chaptername
Common application specific functions: General
Objects associated with specific applications
Application-specific instructions
Appendices
Page
15
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Shared application-specific functions
16
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Common application specific functions: General
1
Presentation
Aim of this chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter presents the common application specific functions of the PL7 software.
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
General Presentation
Configuration of an application-specific function.
Adjustment of an application-specific function
Debugging an application-specific function
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
17
General
General Presentation
Introduction The PL7 software allows for the installation of application-specific functions in software form (DISCRETE, analog, process control, etc.).
The application-specific functions are automated functions which interface with the control part (the PLC program) and the operational part (sensors, actuators and man/machine interfaces).
l l
An application-specific function on Micro is presented, depending on the application, in the form of: a module (e.g.: counting application), a built-in interface (e.g.: communication port).
Integrated interface
C o u n n g i t
A n a
0
TSX
3722
1
DMZ
28DR
2
3
4
5
6
7 9
8 10
Application-specific module
18
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Software installation principle
Software installation resources
General
The table below gives a short description of the general principle for the installation of an application-specific function. This principle will be covered again later in this manual in more specific detail for each application.
Mode
Local
Local or online
Online
Phase Description
Configuration Configuration of the module or built-in interface
Symbolization Symbolization of variables associated with the application-specific function.
Programming Programming of the function to be carried out using: l l bit and word objects associated with the module, application-specific instructions.
Transfer Transferring the application to the PLC.
Documentation Printing of the different information about the application.
Debug Debugging the application (I/O control, fault identification).
Note: The order shown above is given as an indication only; the PL7 software allows the editors to be used interactively in the order required (however, the data or program editor cannot be used if the I/O modules have not been configured first).
An application-specific function is installed using: l standard PL7 tools: l pull-down menus, l l status bars, tool bars, l editors, l ...
application-specific screens, l l configuration screens, adjustment screens, l l debug screens, language objects giving program-based access to inputs and outputs of the module or built-in interface.
l instructions relative to the application-specific function, where applicable.
Note: The different screens as well as the objects associated with an applicationspecific module are accessible via the software as soon as the module is declared in the configuration, without it even being necessary to write a program line.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
19
General
Configuration of an application-specific function.
Introduction The Configuration function makes it possible to define the operating characteristics of the module or the application-specific interface.
l l
This function is carried out from the PL7 configuration editor: in local mode, in online mode when the application is stored in non-write protected RAM (limited to certain parameters).
Note: The configuration parameters are not modifiable by program.
Illustration The screen below is an example of a configuration screen of an application-specific module (application-specific module TSY CTZ 2A).
TSX CTZ 2A [POSITION 04 ]
Configuration
Designation : 2 CHAN. MULTIF COUNT 40kHz
Counter 0
Function: des cames
Up/Down counting
Input interfaces
IA Up/Down counts, application
Solid state counter
Line check Multiply by 1
Preset on IPres
Rising edge IPres
Read on IRead
Rising edgeIRead by 4
Task : des cames
MAST
Event
EVT l l
Here, the operating characteristics are: l the selection of a function associated with a channel: up counting, down counting or up/down counting, selection of the task which updates the inputs/outputs of the module,
...
20
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Confirmation
General
The characteristics defined in the configuration screen must be subject to a global confirmation of the application. This may be done: l l in local mode, so that the modifications are taken into account, in online mode in order to: l l update the configuration parameters in the PLC, reconfigure the channel of the module with its new parameters (the adjustment parameters return to their initial value).
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
21
General
Adjustment of an application-specific function
Introduction The Adjustment function allows the operating parameters of the applicationspecific module or interface to be displayed and modified, when they are modifiable.
This function is carried out from the PL7 adjustment editor: l in local mode, in order to define the initial parameters (value of the parameters during setup or on a cold restart), l in online mode, in order to define the current parameters (values lost upon cold restart if they have not been saved in advance).
Note: The adjustment parameters are modifiable by program.
Illustration
Confirmation
The screen below is an example of an adjustment screen of an application-specific module (application-specific module TSY CTZ 2A).
TSX CTZ 2A [POSITION 03 ]
Adjust
Designation : 2 CHAN MULTIF COUNT 40kHz
Symbol :
Counter :
Counter 0
Function:
Up/Down counting
Preset value
Initial value
1 000
1000
Threshold value
Threshold
Initial value
2 000
2000
Threshold
Initial value
3 000
3000
Setpoint values
High
Initial value
Low
Initial value
0
0
0
0
Counter output state
Here, the operating parameters are: l l l the threshold values, the setpoint values, the counter output states.
l l
The characteristics defined in the adjustment screen must, depending on the mode, be subject to: local: a global confirmation of the application, online: confirmation of the modifications in order to update the current parameters in the PLC and on the module channel.
22
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
General
Debugging an application-specific function
Introduction
Illustration
The Debug function of the module or the built-in application-specific interface l l l l l provides the tools to help with debugging of the application-specific function such as: display of module channel status, display of possible faults, control of language objects, and, in the event of a fault, access to the module or channel diagnostics,
...
This function is carried out in online mode , with the PLC in STOP or in RUN, from the PL7 debug editor.
The screen below is an example of a debug screen of an application-specific module
(application-specific module TSX DMZ 28DR).
TSX DMZ 28DR [OUTPUTS : POSITION 02]
Debug
Designation : 16I 24VDC+12Q REL TBLK
Global unforcing DIAG...
Fault Applied Q
STOP
Function Chan.
0
1
2
3
6
7
4
5
8
9
10
11
Symbol State
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DIAG...
DIAG...
STOP
Control of channel
Forcing
F4 Force to 0
F5
F6
Write
F7
Force to1
Unforce
Set
F8 Reset x l l
Here the debug tools are: forcing of the output channels to 0 or 1, access to module and channel diagnostics.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
23
General
24
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Objects associated with specific applications
2
Presentation
Aim of this chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter presents the addressing and the exchange modes for language objects associated with PL7 specific applications.
This Chapter contains the following Sections:
Section
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Topic
Addressing of language objects associated with specific applications
Implicit exchanges
Explicit exchanges
Presymbolization
Page
25
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Objects associated with specific applications
2.1
Addressing of language objects associated with specific applications
Presentation
Aim of this section
What's in this
Section?
This section presents the addressing of language objects associated with application-specific modules.
This Section contains the following Maps:
Topic
Addressing of built-in application-specific interfaces
Addressing in-rack Input/Output module objects
Addressing of language objects associated with AS-i bus
Page
26
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Objects associated with specific applications
Addressing of built-in application-specific interfaces
At a Glance The Micro range provides up to 4 built-in application-specific interfaces, l l l l according to PLC type: terminal socket link, communication interface, analog channels, counting/down counting channels.
Illustration The illustration below locates each in-built interface for different PLC types.
Analog channels
Terminal socket link
Communication interface
Counting/down counting channels
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
27
Objects associated with specific applications
Channel number The table below provides the addressing of the different built-in application-specific channels.
PLC Terminal socket
Communicatio n interface
TSX 37-05/08/10 Channel
TSX 37-21
TSX 37-22
0
-
Channel 1
-
analog input channels
Channels 2 to 9
-
-
Analog output channel
Channel 10
-
-
Counting/down counting channels
Channels 11 and 12
Example %IW0.2
contains the channel 2 analog entry process value.
28
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Objects associated with specific applications
Addressing in-rack Input/Output module objects
At a Glance
Illustration
Addressing of main bit and word objects of input/output modules is done geographl l ically. That means that it depends: on the physical position of the module in the rack, on the module channel number.
Addressing is defined in the following way:
%
Symbol
I, Q, M, K
Object type
X, W, D, F
Format
Y
Position i
Channel no.
r
Position
Syntax
Family
Symbol
Object type
Format (size)
Module position
Channel no.
The table below describes the different elements of addressing.
i
W
D
F
Element Values Description
%
I
Q
M
K
X y
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Picture of the physical input of the module,
Picture of the physical output of the module,
This information is exchanged automatically at each cycle of the task to which it is attached.
Internal variable.
This reading or writing information is exchanged as the application requires.
Internal constant.
This configuration information is available as read only.
Boolean.
For Boolean objects this element can be omitted.
16 bits
32 bits
Single length.
Double length.
32 bits
0 to 4
0 to 6
0 to 8
0 to 10
Floating point.
The floating format used is the IEEE Std 754-1985 standard (equivalent to
IEC 559).
Position number in the rack.
TSX 37-05
TSX 37-08
TSX 37-10
TSX 37-21/22
0 to 31 or
MOD
MOD: channel reserved for managing the module and the parameters common to all the channels.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
29
Objects associated with specific applications
Family
Position
Element r
Values
0 to 15 or
ERR
Description
Position of the bit in the word.
ERR: indicates a module or channel fault.
Examples
Object
%IW0.8
%I1.5
%Q1.2
%IW7.1
%I1.MOD.ERR
The table below presents some examples of object addressing.
Description Illustration
Process value of the channel 8 analog input of the built-in application-specific interface.
Channel 5 input status of TSX DMZ 64 DTK module situated in position 1 in the rack.
Channel 2 output status of TSX DMZ 64 DTK module situated in position 1 in the rack.
Channel 1analog input process value of TSX
AEZ 801 module situated in position 7 in the rack.
Information of a fault on TSX DMZ 64 DTK module situated in position 1 in the rack.
0
2
2
3
7
T
S
X m m c o
1 2 3
1
0
S
A
Z
4
30
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Objects associated with specific applications
Addressing of language objects associated with AS-i bus
At a Glance
Illustration
Addressing of the main bit and word objects linked to the AS-i bus is geographical.
That means that it is dependent on the number (address) of the slave device on the
AS-I bus.
Addressing is defined in the following way:
% I or Q
Symbol Object type
\ 4.0
Module/channel of
TSX SAZ 10
\ n
Slave number i
Bit position
Syntax
Family
Symbol
Object type
Module position
Channel no.
Slave number
Position
The table below describes the different elements of addressing.
i
0 n
Element Values Description
% -
I
Q
4
-
-
-
Picture of the physical input of the module,
Picture of the physical output of the module,
This information is exchanged automatically at each cycle of the task to which it is attached.
Position number in the rack.
It is vital that the TSX SAZ10 module is positioned in slot 4.
-
0 to 31
0 to 3
The TSX SAZ 10 module only has one channel.
Physical slave address.
Position of the input or output bit image.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
31
Objects associated with specific applications
Example The table below presents some examples of object addressing.
Object
%I\4.0\2.1
%Q\4.0\6.3
Description
Input 1 of slave 2, with the module TSX SAZ 10 being positioned in slot
4 on rack 0.
Output 3 of slave 6, with the module TSX SAZ 10 being positioned in slot
4 on rack 0.
2
0
0
2
2
3
7
T
S
X c o m m
1 3
1
0
S
A
Z
4
0
1
2 P ABE-8S40SB00
3
4 P
ZB2-BZS2@
32
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Objects associated with specific applications
2.2
Implicit exchanges
Implicit exchanges
Presentation A built-in specific application interface where the addition of a module automatically enhances the application of language objects making it possible to program this interface or module.
These objects correspond to the images of the I/Os of the module or built-in specific application module.
The %I bits and the %IW words, images of the module's input values are updated automatically in the PLC processor at the start of the task, whether the task is in
RUN or STOP mode.
The %Q bits and %QW words, images of the module's output values are updated automatically in the module by the processor at the end of the task, with the task in
RUN mode.
Note: When the task in STOP mode, depending on the configuration chosen: l l the outputs are in the fallback position (fallback mode), the outputs are maintained at their last value (maintain mode).
Illustration The graph illustrates the operational cycle relating to a PLC task (cyclical execution).
Internal processing
Acquisition of input
RUN STOP
Program processing
Updating of output
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
33
Objects associated with specific applications
Examples
Object
%I13.1
%IW4.2
%IW3.2:X4
%Q6.5
%I6.5.ERR
%I7.MOD.ERR
-
The table below shows several examples of implicit exchanges relating to a given application.
Description Specific application
Discrete
Analog
Counting
Discrete
-
Gives the status of channel 1 of the module located in position 3.
Gives the analog value of channel 2 of the module located in position 4.
Gives the status of the capture input of the module located in position 3.
Gives the status of channel 5 of the module located in position 6.
Indicates, when the bit is set to 1, that channel 5 of the module located in position 6 is faulty.
Indicates, when the bit is set to 1, that the module located in position 7 is faulty.
34
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Objects associated with specific applications
2.3
Explicit exchanges
Presentation
Aim of this section
What's in this
Section?
This section presents the principle of explicit exchanges as well as the different instructions which allow them to be carried out.
This Section contains the following Maps:
Topic
Explicit exchanges: General
READ_STS: Reading status words
WRITE_CMD: Writing command words
READ_PARAM: Reading adjustment parameters
WRITE_PARAM: Writing adjustment parameters
SAVE_PARAM: Saving adjustment parameters
RESTORE_PARAM: Restoring adjustment parameters
Exchange and report management
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
35
Objects associated with specific applications
Explicit exchanges: General
Introduction Explicit exchanges are exchanges carried out on request of the program user using instructions: l l l l l
READ_STS (reading status words),
WRITE_CMD (writing command words),
WRITE_PARAM (writing adjustment parameters),
READ_PARAM (reading adjustment parameters),
SAVE_PARAM (saving adjustment parameters), l RESTORE_PARAM (restoring adjustment parameters).
These exchanges apply to a group of %MW objects that are of the same type
(status, command or parameter) on the same channel.
Note: These objects are not essential when programming a application-specific function, but they carry extra information (eg: terminal block fault, module absent…) and the additional orders for advanced programming of the application specific functions (for more information on the explicit exchange Objects which are relative to a task, you can refer to the corresponding chapter).
General principles on the use of the explicit instructions
The diagram below presents the different kinds of explicit exchanges that are possible between the PLC’s processor and the module (or the built-in interface).
PLC processor
I/O module or interface built-in application
%MWy.i.r objects
or
%MWy.MOD.r (1)
Status words READ_STS
Status words
Command words
WRITE_CMD
Command words
Adjustment parameters: current
WRITE_PARAM
READ_PARAM
SAVE_PARAM
Adjustment parameters: current
Adjustment parameters: initial
RESTORE_PARAM
(1) Only with the instructions READ_STS and WRITE_CMD.
36
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Managing exchanges
Objects associated with specific applications
During an explicit exchange, it may be interesting to monitor the progress that this makes, in order, for example, not to take into consideration the data read until the exchange has been carried out successfully.
For this, two kinds of information are available: l l the detection of an exchange which is in progress, the end of exchange report.
The diagram below describes the principal of the management of an exchange
Execution of an explicit exchange
Detection of an exchange in progress
Report of the end of the exchange
Logical channel
%CHy.i
The %CHy.i channel is a general syntax for updating all of the objects which are of the same type and linked to this channel or to this group of channels, via the explicit instructions.
Example: READ_STS%CH2.3
(reading the status words of channel 3 on module 2).
Note: In the case of a group of channels, the address used has to be the address of the first channel in the group of channels which is managed by the module.
Example: In the case of 32 discrete inputs (4 groups of 8 input channels, 0 to 7, 8 to 15, …) situated in slot 3. In order to read channel 12’s status words (fifth channel of the second group of channels), the syntax to use is: READ_STS%CH3.8
.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
37
Objects associated with specific applications
READ_STS: Reading status words
Introduction Status words contain information about the functioning state of the module or the channel.
The READ_STS instruction allows reading in the module (or in the built-in interface) of these kind of words. This reading updates the %MW status words .
These words can be used to carry out diagnostics by program.
Note: The status words are specific to each task. However, 2 words are used by l l all of the modules in the Micro range:
%MWy.MOD.2 (module level fault),
%MWy.i.2 (channel i level fault).
Illustration Writing instruction
Processor PLC
Objects %MWy.ir or %MWy.MOD.2
Status words READ_STS
E/S Module or interface built-in task
Status words
Syntax
Examples
38
The READ_STS instruction is defined in the following way :
READ_STS%CHy.i
The table below describes the different elements that are part of the instruction.
i
Element
READ_STS
%CH y
Description
Name of the instruction
Channel-type object
Module position.
Channel or MOD number.
The example below presents some examples of explicit exchanges using the
READ_STS instruction.
Object
READ_STS%CH2.1
READ_STS%CH1.MOD
Description
Reading the status words of channel 1, which is on the module situated in position 2.
Reading the status words of the module situated in position 1.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Objects associated with specific applications
WRITE_CMD: Writing command words
Introduction The command words act on the module or the channel (e.g.: reactivation of discrete outputs).
The WRITE_CMD instruction enables the %MW command words to be written to the module (or the built-in interface).
Note: The command words are specific to each application.
Illustration Write instruction
Processor PLC
Objects %MWy.i.r or %MWy.MOD.2
Command words
WRITE_CMD
E/S Module or interface built-in task
Command words
Syntax
Example
The WRITE_CMD instruction is defined as follows:
WRITE_CMD%CHy.i
The table below describes the different elements which constitute the instruction.
i
Element Description
WRITE_CMD Name of instruction.
%CH y
Channel-type object.
Module position.
Channel number.
The table below gives an example of an explicit exchange using the WRITE_CMD instruction.
Object
WRITE_CMD%CH3.0
Description
Writing the command information of channel 0 of the module located in position 3.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
39
Objects associated with specific applications
READ_PARAM: Reading adjustment parameters
Introduction
Illustration
The READ_PARAM instruction enables the adjustment parameters of the module
(or built-in interface) to be read.
Reading updates the status words associated with the adjustment parameters
%MWy.i.r .
Read instruction
Processor PLC
%MWy.i.r objects
Current adjustment parameters
READ_PARAM
E/S Module or interface built-in task
Current adjustment parameters
Syntax
Example
The READ_PARAM instruction is defined as follows:
READ_PARAM%CHy.i
The table below describes the different elements which constitute the instruction.
i
Element Description
READ_PARAM Name of instruction.
%CH y
Channel-type object.
Module position.
Channel number.
The table below gives an example of an explicit exchange using the READ_PARAM instruction.
Object
READ_PARAM%CH3.1
Description
Reading the adjustment parameters of channel 1 of the module located in position 3.
40
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Objects associated with specific applications
WRITE_PARAM: Writing adjustment parameters
Introduction
Illustration
The WRITE_PARAM instruction enables the adjustment parameters to be written to the module (or the built-in interface).
This instruction enables the adjustment values defined in the configuration contained in the %MWy.i.r words to be modified by the program .
Write instruction
Processor PLC
E/S Module or interface built-in task
%MWy.i.r objects
WRITE_PARAM
Adjustment parameters current
Adjustment parameters current
Syntax
Example
The WRITE_PARAM instruction is defined as follows:
WRITE_PARAM%CHy.i
The table below describes the different elements which constitute the instruction.
i
Element
WRITE_PARAM
%CH y
Description
Name of instruction.
Channel-type object.
Module position.
Channel number.
The table below gives an example of an explicit exchange using the
WRITE_PARAM instruction.
Object
WRITE_PARAM%CH3.1
Description
Writing the adjust parameters of channel 1 of the module located in position 3.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
41
Objects associated with specific applications
SAVE_PARAM: Saving adjustment parameters
Introduction When modifying the module’s (or built-in interfaces’) adjustment parameters, the
SAVE_PARAM instruction allows you to save these new parameters and substitute them for the initial parameters.
These parameters replace the initial defined values with the help of the configuration editor (or of the last save ).
The SAVE_PARAM instruction is the equivalent to the order Services → Save parameters
Note: During a cold start, the current parameters (not saved) are replaced by the initial parameters.
Illustration Writing instruction
Processor PLC
%MWy.i.r objects
Adjustment parameters current
Adjustment parameters initial
SAVE_PARAM
E/S Module or interface built-in task
Adjustment parameters current
Syntax The SAVE_PARAM instruction is defined in the following way:
SAVE_PARAM%CHy.i
The table below describes the different elements that are part of the instruction.
i
Element
SAVE_PARAM
%CH y
Description
Name of the instruction.
Channel-type object.
Module position.
Channel number.
42
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Example
Objects associated with specific applications
The table below presents an example of explicit exchange using the instruction
SAVE_PARAM.
Object
SAVE_PARAM%CH5.2
Description
Reading then saving the adjustment parameters of channel 2, which is part of the module situated in position 5.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
43
Objects associated with specific applications
RESTORE_PARAM: Restoring adjustment parameters
Introduction
Illustration
The RESTORE_PARAM instruction allows you to restore the initial adjustment parameters (written during configuration or during the last save).
The RESTORE_PARAM instruction is the equivalent to the order Services → Save parameters
Writing instruction
Processor PLC
%MWy.i.r objects
Adjustment parameters current
RESTORE_PARAM
E/S Module or interface built-in task
Adjustment parameters current
Adjustment parameters initial
Syntax
Example
The RESTORE_PARAM instruction is defined in the following way:
RESTORE_PARAM%CHy.i
The table below describes the different elements that are part of the instruction.
i
Element Description
RESTORE_PARAM Name of the instruction
%CH y
Channel-type object.
Module position.
Channel number.
The table below presents an example of explicit exchange using the instruction
RESTORE_PARAM.
Object Description
RESTORE_PARAM%CH1.0
Writing the adjustment parameters of channel 0, which is part of the module situated in position 1.
44
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Objects associated with specific applications
Exchange and report management
Introduction When data is exchanged between the PLC memory and the module, several task cycles may be required for the exchange to be acknowledged by the interface card.
2 words are used to manage the exchanges: l l
%MWy.i.0: Exchange in progress,
%MWy.i.1: Report
Note: These words are described in detail in each part on specific applications.
Illustration The illustration below shows the various bits which are significant for exchange management.
Reconfiguration (X15)
Adjust (X2)
Command (X1)
State (X0)
%MWy.i.0
%MWy.i.1
Status words READ_STS
Command words
Adjustment parameters
WRITE_CMD
WRITE_PARAM
READ_PARAM
SAVE_PARAM
RESTORE_PARAM
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
45
Objects associated with specific applications
Description of significant bits
Each of the bits of the words %MWy.i.0 and %MWy.i.1 is associated with a type of parameter: l position 0 bits are associated with status parameters: l the bit %MWy.i.0:X0 indicates whether a status word read request is in progress, l l l position 1 bits are associated with command parameters: l the bit %MWy.i.0:X1 indicates whether the control parameters have been sent to channel i of the module, l the bit %MWy.i.1:X1 specifies whether the control parameters have been accepted by channel i of the module, position 2 bits are associated with adjustment parameters: l the bit %MWy.i.0:X2 indicates whether the adjustment parameters have been exchanged with channel i of the module (by WRITE_PARAM, READ_PARAM,
SAVE_PARAM, RESTORE_PARAM), l the bit %MWy.i.1:X2 specifies whether the adjustment parameters have been accepted by the module. If the exchange has been made successfully the bit is set to 0, the position 15 bits indicate that channel i of the module has been reconfigured from the terminal (modification of the configuration parameters + cold start of the channel).
Note: The exchange and report words also exist at module level (%MWy.MOD and
%MWy.MOD.1).
46
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Example
Objects associated with specific applications
Phase 1: Transmission of data using the WRITE_PARAM instruction
PLC memory
1
0
Status words
Command words
Current adjustment parameters
E/S module memory or built-in application specific function
Status words
Command words
Current adjustment parameters
When the instruction is scanned by the PLC processor, the Exchange in progress bit is set to 1 in %MWy.
Phase 2: Analysis of data by the I/O module and report
PLC memory
0
1
Status words
Command words
Current adjustment parameters
E/S module memory or built-in application specific function
Status words
Command words
Current adjustment parameters
When data is exchanged between the PLC memory and the module, acknowledgment by the interface card is managed by the %MWy.i.1:X2 bit: Report
(0 = exchange successful, 1=exchange unsuccessful).
Note: There are no adjustment parameters at module level.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
47
Objects associated with specific applications
2.4
Presymbolization
Presentation
Purpose of this section
What's in this
Section?
This section presents the presymbolization function for the objects of a specific application.
This Section contains the following Maps:
Topic
Presymbolized objects
Automatic symbolization of objects associated with a channel
Page
48
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Objects associated with specific applications
Presymbolized objects
Role
Syntax
Certain application specific functions (examples: counting, analog, ...) support an automatic symbolization of the objects which are linked to them.
If you give the generic symbol of the module’s %CHy.i channel, all of the symbols of the objects linked to this channel can then be automatically generated on request.
These objects are symbolized with the following syntax:
PREFIX_USER_SUFFIX_MANUFACTURER
The elements have the following meaning and characteristics:
Element
PREFIX_USER
SUFFIX_MANUFACT
URER
Maximum number of characters
12
20
Description generic symbol given to the channel by the user part of the symbol which corresponds to the bit object or word of the channel given by the system
Example
Note: As well as the symbol, a manufacturer’s comment is automatically generated, this comment recalls succinctly the object’s role.
This example shows a counting module situated in slot 3 of the automatic tray.
If the generic symbol (prefix-user) given to channel 0 is COMPT_PIECES , the following symbols are automatically generated.
Address Type
%CH3.0
CH
%ID3.0
%ID3.0.4
%I3.0
%I3.0.1
DWORD
DWORD
Symbol
COMPT_PIECES_CUR-MEAS
COMPT_PIECES_CAPT
Comment
Counter current value
Counter captured value
EBOOL COMPT_PIECES_ENAB_ACTIV Counter enable active
EBOOL COMPT_PIECES_PRES_DONE Preset done
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
49
Objects associated with specific applications
Automatic symbolization of objects associated with a channel
Introduction
Conditions required
Procedure
The manufacturer's presymbolization (manufacturer's suffix) assigned to language objects is specific to each application. The detailed list of these suffixes is contained in the documentation relating to the specific application concerned.
Automatic symbolization implies that: l l the module has been declared in the PL7 configuration in advance.
the application-specific module accepts this function. The specific applications concerned are: l l l analog, counting, communication.
The table below shows the procedure for the automatic symbolization of objects associated with a channel.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Action
Access the variable editor.
Access to I/O type variables.
Note: The channels whose objects can be symbolized have a letter P on the button to the left of the %CH address.
Double-click on the P button for the channel to be symbolized.
Enter the user prefix.
Note: If a symbol is already defined for the channel, the prefix proposed is the retrieved symbol truncated to 12 characters.
Confirm with the Presymbolize button.
De-activating automatic symbolization.
Canceling automatic symbolization, for a given logical channel, makes it possible to delete all or part of an object's symbols.
Two options are proposed:
If the option chosen is …
Delete all presymbols
Delete prefixed presymbols then …
No prefix is chosen: all symbols are deleted (including those which have been modified directly using the editor).
Only objects with a prefix identical to that entered are deleted.
50
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Application-specific instructions
3
Presentation
Aim of this chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter presents the application-specific instructions.
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
Application-specific instructions
Accessing a specific function, method or procedure type instruction
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
51
Application-specific instructions
Application-specific instructions
Introduction Application-specific instructions (of function, method or procedure type) are programming instructions specific to an application-specific function which supplement the basic and advanced instructions.
They are defined in the documentation of each specific application.
The parameters are always the following PL7 language objects: words, word tables, immediate values.
Note: The Function type instructions require a supplementary memory application
(only when they are actually used in the program). This memory requirement is to be considered for each function however much it is used, and this should be done in accordance with the memory capacity of the PLC in question.
Example of a specific instruction
The (procedure type) DISPLAY_MSG function which is dedicated to operator dialog
(CCX 17) consoles is used to display a status message contained in the CCX 17 memory.
l l l
DISPLAY_MSG (ADR#0.0.4,%KW200,%MW10:4)
Each parameter has a particular meaning:
ADR#0.0.4
%KW200
...
is the console address,
contains the data to be sent,
52
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Application-specific instructions
Accessing a specific function, method or procedure type instruction
Presentation
Calling up a function
Application-specific function entry can be accessed by: l l directly entering the instruction and its parameters in an operate block, by the entry help function accessible through the program editors (LD, IL, ST).
Step
1
2
Action
Access the required editor.
Depending on the editor used, choose one of the following methods to open the function library.
l l l
Press Shift + F8 (LD, IL,ST editors).
Click on the (LD editor) icon.
Select the command Utilities
→
Note: The function library appears.
Enter call for a (IL, ST editors) function.
PL7 : Library functions
EF
Function information Parameters
Family
Characters string
Communication
Call format
Lib.V. App.V
Name
2.00
SMOVE
Interpolation Command 1.0
-
Movement Command 2.00
-
3.07
-
Parameters of the METHOD:
Name Type Kind Comment
Channel MAIN Channel
NRUN WORD
G9 World
IN
IN
Movement number
G9
Detail...
Comment
Automatic movement command
Family
%CH103.2
01
90
?
3
4
5
Display the call
SMOVE %CH103.2 ( 01.90.01.10000000.20000.0 )
OK Cancel
Select the specific application in the Family field.
Select the instruction in the Name field.
Many of the instructions have a customized entry help screen.
Access this screen by clicking on the Details button.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
53
Application-specific instructions
Step
6
7
Action
Enter each instruction parameter (each instruction is developed in the relevant application-specific documentation) l in the customized screen or l in the Entry field in the Library Functions screen. To do this, the Parameter item must be selected in the Function Information field.
Click Ok to confirm.
54
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Appendices
4
Presentation
Aim of this chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter introduces several elementary notions that are useful for the installation of application-specific functions.
Some of these notions are taken from the PL7 Installation and Start-up Guide.
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
Reminders concerning the configuration editor
The PL7 toolbar
The PL7 status bar
How to declare a module in a PLC rack
Confirming the configuration of a module.
Globally reconfiguring an application.
Application-specific fault processing (in-rack modules) by program
Page
55
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Appendices
Reminders concerning the configuration editor
Presentation
Illustration
The configuration editor enables the various constitutive elements of the PLC to be declared and configured in a graphical and intuitive manner: l l l rack, power supply, processor, l application-specific modules.
In online mode the configuration editor also performs debug, adjustment and diagnostics functions.
The following screen provides an example of a hardware configuration.
C o u n n g i t
A n a
0
TSX
3722
1
2
DMZ
28DR
3
DEZ
08A4
DSZ
08R5
4
5
AEZ
802
6
ASZ
401
7
8
DEZ
32D2
9
10
DSZ
32T2
Accessing the editor
The following table shows the different ways of accessing the configuration editor.
From: the menu bar the application browser
Action
Select Tools
→
Configuration .
Double-click on Hardware configuration or select it using the arrow keys and confirm with Enter .
Application Browser
Structure View
STATION
Configuration
Hardware configuration
Software configuration
Program
MAST Task
Events
DFB types
Variables
Animation tables
56
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Appendices
The PL7 toolbar
Presentation
Illustration
Elements and functions
The software's basic functions can be accessed quickly via the toolbar, using the mouse.
Access to the different functions is dynamic and varies according to the context.
The PL7 toolbar is displayed as follows:
?
?
This table gives the function of each element in the toolbar:
Element Function
New application
Element Function
Local mode
Open an application Online mode
Save the application
Print all or part of the application
Undo last modifications
Confirm modifications
Go to
Application browser
RUN
PLC changes to RUN
STOP
PLC changes to STOP
Start / Stop the animation
Organize windows so that they overlap
Tile windows horizontally
Tile windows vertically
Cross references
Function library
PLC <-> terminal transfer
?
?
Help
What's this?
Note: All these functions can also be accessed via the menu.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
57
Appendices
The PL7 status bar
At a Glance The status bar, situated at the bottom of the screen, shows a range of information associated with operational aspects of the software.
Illustration The PL7 status bar appears thus:
1
Ready
2 3 4
ONLINE STOP U:SYS
5 6
GR7 OK MODIF
7 8
OVR CAPS
Elements and functions
This table describes the different zones that make up the status bar:
4
5
2
3
6
Number Zone
1 Information
Operating mode
PLC state
Function supplies information concerning menu commands, toolbar icons and the different editors when these are selected.
indicates the current operating mode (offline, online).
indicates the PLC state (Run, Stop, faulty, etc.).
Network address gives the network address of the PLC.
Grafcet mode indicates whether Grafcet mode is used in the application.
Modification in progress indicates that the current application has not been saved or is different from the back-up.
7
8
Animation indicator
Keyboard functions indicates that the PLC is in online mode.
indicates the status of the functions.
Insert and All Caps keyboard
58
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Appendices
How to declare a module in a PLC rack
Procedure This operation enables the user to make a software declaration of a module in a PLC rack.
The example below concerns a Discrete module; the same procedure is used whatever the type of in-rack module.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the application's hardware configuration screen.
Double-click on the slot in which the module is to be configured.
Result: the Add module screen appears.
Add modul
Family:
Analog Modules 1.5
Communication 1.5
Counting 1.5
Discrete 1.5
Simulation 1,0
Tout ou Rien1.5
Module:
TSX DEZ 08A5
TSX DEZ 12D2
TSX DEZ 12D2K
TSX DEZ 08A4
TSX DMZ 16DTK
TSX DPZ 10D2A
TSX DSZ 04T22
TSX DSZ 08T2
TSX DSZ 08T2K
TSX DSZ 08R5
8I 200-240VAC TBLK
12I 24VDC TBLK
12I 24VDC CONN
8I 115VAC TBLK
8I 24VDC+8Q 0,5A CONN
EMERG.STOP 8I 24VDC+2Q
4Q 2A 24VDC TBLK
8Q 0.5A 24VDC TBLK
8Q 0.5A 24VDC CONN
8Q REL TBLK
OK
Cancel
3
4
5
Select the specific application (e.g.: Discrete ) in the Family field.
Select the module reference in the Module field.
Click on Ok to confirm the selection.
Result: the module is declared in its slot; the slot is shown in gray and contains the module reference. u n
C o i t n g
A n a
0
TSX
3722
1
2
3
DEZ
08A5
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
59
Appendices
Confirming the configuration of a module.
Introduction
Illustration
When a module is declared, and when the configuration or adjustment parameters are modified, this module's configuration must be confirmed.
The table below shows where the confirmation of a module's configuration is positioned within the various hardware installation phases of an application.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Declaration of a module:
Configuration of module channels.
Adjustment
Confirmation of the configuration of the module.
Declaration and/or parametering of new modules
Global confirmation of the application
Procedure The table below shows the procedure for confirming the configuration of a module.
Step
1
Action
Select Edit
→
Confirm or use the icon located in the toolbar.
60
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Appendices
Globally reconfiguring an application.
Introduction An application needs to be globally reconfigured in order for the modifications confirmed for each module to be taken into account. This is generally carried out in local mode,
Note: Global reconfiguration of an application in online mode causes the module to stop.
Illustration
Procedure
The table below shows where the global reconfiguration of an application is positioned within the various hardware installation phases of an application.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Declaration of a module:
Configuration of module channels
Adjustment
Confirmation of the configuration of the module
Declaration and/or parametering of new modules
Global confirmation of the application
The table below shows the procedure for globally reconfiguring a module.
Step
1
2
Action
Select Edit
→
Confirm ...
or use the icon located in the toolbar.
Confirm the reconfiguration:
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
61
Appendices
Application-specific fault processing (in-rack modules) by program
Presentation
Algorithm
Application-specific fault processing can be performed using the debugging and diagnostics screens.
It may however be advantageous to use a program to perform this processing.
The following algorithm is an application example of the detection and management application-specific (in rack) module faults by a program.
Test the %S10 bit
(general input/output default)
No default of input/output
No
%S10=0 ?
Yes
Locate the module at default in the rack
%Iy.MOD.ERR = 1
Diagnose the default module
READ_STS %CHy.MOD
%MWy.MOD.2
Locate the channel at default via
%Iy.i.ERR = 1
Diagnose the default channel
READ_STS %CHy.i
%MWy.i.2
62
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Discrete application
II
At a Glance
Aim of this Part
What's in this part?
This part presents the Discrete application-specific function on TSX37 PLCs and describes its installation using PL7 Micro, Junior and Pro software.
This Part contains the following Chapters:
Chapter
5
6
7
8
Chaptername
General introduction to the discrete application -specific function
Discrete application configuration
Debugging discrete modules
Bits and words associated with discrete specific applications
Page
63
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Discrete application
64
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
General introduction to the discrete application -specific function
5
Introduction to the discrete application
Introduction The application-specific discrete function on the Micro applies to rack-mounted discrete input/output modules.
In order to install the discrete application, the physical context (processor and l l module type, and the position of the modules in the rack) must be defined and the necessary software installation carried out.
This second aspect will be carried out using the different PL7 editors: either in local mode, or in online mode. In this case, modification is limited to certain parameters.
Note: The application program can be created before the physical configuration to prevent it from being linked to a certain type of hardware. However, program execution will depend upon the definition of the physical configuration
65
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
General introduction
Installation principles
Mode
Local
Local or online
Online
The table below shows the different installation phases of the discrete applicationspecific function.
Phase
Declaration of a module
Configuration of module channels
Description
Selection of the module and its geographical position
Entry of configuration parameters.
Confirmation of configuration parameters
(See Configuration of
Confirmation of module level.
Global confirmation of the application (See Confirming the configuration of a
Confirmation of application level.
Programming
Transfer
Documentation
Debugging
Programming of functions to be performed by the application using: l l bit and word objects associated with the module, specific application instructions.
Transferring the application to the PLC.
Printing the different information relating to the application.
Debugging of the application using: l debugging help screens enabling the user to control inputs/ outputs, l diagnostics screens enabling the user to identify faults.
Note: The order shown above is given as an indication only. The PL7 software allows the editors to be used interactively in the order required (however, the data editor cannot be used if the input/output modules have not been configured first).
66
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Discrete application configuration
6
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter describes the Configuration aspect of the installation of the discrete application.
This Chapter contains the following Sections:
Section
6.1
6.2
6.3
Topic
Configuring a discrete module: General
Discrete input/output channel parameters
Configuration of discrete parameters
Page
67
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Discrete application configuration
6.1
Configuring a discrete module: General
At a Glance
Aim of this
Section
What's in this
Section?
This section describes the basic operations required for configuring a Discrete module.
This Section contains the following Maps:
Topic
Description of the configuration screen for a discrete module
How to access the configuration parameters of a discrete module.
Modifying the configuration parameters of a discrete module's: General
Page
68
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Discrete application configuration
Description of the configuration screen for a discrete module
At a Glance
Illustration
The configuration screen of the module selected in the rack displays the parameters associated with the Discreteinput or output channels.
This screen gives access to parameter viewing and modification in local mode, and
Debugging in online mode.
1
2
3
TSX DMZ 28DTK [POSITION 01]
Configuration
Designation: 16E 24VCC+12S 0.5A CONN
Channel
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
Symbol Supply fault monitoring
Active
Task
MAST
MAST
Filtering
4 ms
4 ms
4 ms
4 ms
Inputs
Function
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
69
Discrete application configuration
Description The table below shows the different elements in the configuration screen and their functions.
Number Element
1 Title bar
2
4
Function
Indicates the reference of the selected module and its physical position in the rack.
Module zone Enables the user to select: l the installation phase: l l
Configuration ,
Debugging (diagnostics), only accessible in online mode.
l the type of channels (inputs or outputs), if the module in question has both inputs and outputs.
Displays the designation of the selected module.
According to the type of module, gives access to the configuration parameters which apply to all the channels of the same type of the module in question, such as: l l the type of inputs (positive or negative Logic), the network frequency, l ...
Displaying this zone is optional. The selection is made using the command View
→
Module zone .
Channel zone Enables the different channels to be parameterizeded. The Symbol column displays the symbol associated with the channel when this has been defined by the user (via the variables editor).
Note: For discrete modules with more than 16 channels of the same type, use the scrollbar to access the different groups of channels.
70
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Discrete application configuration
How to access the configuration parameters of a discrete module.
Procedure This operation enables the user to access the configuration parameters for the channels of a discrete module.
Step Action
Access the module’s Hardware configuration screen.
Double-click on the module to be configured or select the module and execute the command Service
→
Open module .
For a standard format module which occupies two positions, double clicking on the high position will display the input channels parametering screen, and double clicking on the low position will display the output channels parametering screen.
Result : the configuration screen for the selected module appears.
TSX DMZ 28DT [POSITION 01]
Configuration
Designation: 16E 24VCC+12S 0.5A BORN
Inputs
Chann el
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
Symbol Supply fault monitoring
Enable
Task
MAST
MAST
Filtering
4 ms
4 ms
4 ms
4 ms
Function
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
71
Discrete application configuration
Some modules have a dialog box giving access to additional parameters. To access this dialog box:
Step
1
Action
Perform one of the following: l right click on the row in the table corresponding to the channel to be parametered and then select the Properties command from the pull-down l menu, or double left click on the row in the table corresponding to the channel to be l parameterized, or select the Function cell of the channel to be parameterized and then confirm using Enter .
Result: The dialog box appears, superimposed on the configuration screen.
TSX DMZ 28DT [POSITION 01]
Configuration
Designation: 16E 24VCC+12S 0.5A BORN
Inputs
Chann Symbol
6
7
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
2
3
0
1
13
14
15
Supply fault monitoring Task
Enable MAST
MAST
Filtering
4 ms
4 ms
4 ms
4 ms
Function
Properties of Channel 0
Function
Normal
Latch state 0
Latch state 1
Event processing
Rising
Falling
EVT 0 x
72
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Discrete application configuration
Modifying the configuration parameters of a discrete module's: General
Introduction
Accessing the contextual menus
The configuration editor provides a set of functions which enable the user to input or l l l modify the parameters of modules such as: contextual menus, single or multiple selection of channels, cutting/pasting of parameters (using the contextual menus).
These can be accessed by right-clicking with the mouse, and give quick access to the main commands.
If the element to be selected is... Then the available functions are...
the cell Copy parameters
Paste parameters the module zone (except in tables) Undo modifications
Confirm
Animate
Selecting a channel or cell
The table below shows the procedure for selecting a module channel cell or channel.
Step
1
Action
Left-click on the required cell or channel number.
Selecting a group of consecutive channels
Selecting a group of nonconsecutive channels
The table below shows the procedure for selecting a group of consecutive channels of a module.
Step
1
2
Action
Select the first channel.
Press Shift and click on the last channel.
The table below shows the procedure for selecting a group of non-consecutive channels of a module.
Step
1
2
Action
Select the first channel.
Press Ctrl and click on each of the channels in turn.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
73
Discrete application configuration
Selecting a group of consecutive cells
The table below shows the procedure for selecting a group of consecutive cells of a module.
Step
1
2
Action
Select the first cell.
Move the mouse up or down whilst holding down the mouse button, then release the button when the last cell has been reached.
74
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
6.2
Discrete application configuration
Discrete input/output channel parameters
At a Glance
Aim of this section
What's in this
Section?
This section introduces the different input and output channel parameters by discrete module type.
This Section contains the following Maps:
Topic
Discrete inputs parameters
Discrete output parameters
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
75
Discrete application configuration
Discrete inputs parameters
Key:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
76
At a Glance Discrete input modules contain parameters per channel, or per group of consecutive channels.
Parameters The table below shows the parameters available for each discrete input module.
Module reference
TSX DEZ 08A4
TSX DEZ 08A5
TSX DEZ 12D2
TSX DEZ 12D2K
No. of inputs Associated task (1)
Function (2) Filtering
(group of 4 channels)
Type of logic
8 20 ms -
8
12
12
Mast / Fast
/ None
-
Mast / Fast
/ None
-
Mast / Fast
/ None
-
Mast / Fast
/ None
-
20 ms
4 ms or (4)
positive negative
4 ms or (4) -
/
Networ k
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
-
-
/
/
TSX DEZ 32D2 32 -
TSX DPZ 10D2A
TSX DMZ 16DTK 8 (inputs)
TSX DMZ 28DT
8 (inputs)
16 (inputs)
TSX DMZ 28DTK 16 (inputs)
Mast / Fast
/ None
Normal or (3) 4 ms or (4) -
Mast / Fast
/ None
4 ms or (4) -
Mast / Fast
/ None
4 ms or (4) -
Mast / Fast
/ None
Normal or (3) 4 ms or (4) -
Mast / Fast
/ None
Normal or (3) 4 ms or (4) -
-
-
-
-
TSX DMZ 28DR 16 (inputs)
TSX DMZ 28AR 16 (inputs)
Mast / Fast
/ None
Normal or (3) 4 ms or (4) positive / negative
-
Mast / Fast
/ None
Normal or (3) 20 ms 50 Hz /
60 Hz
Supply fault monitoring
Active /
Inactive
Active /
Inactive
Active /
Inactive
Active /
Inactive
Active /
Inactive
Active /
Inactive
Active /
Inactive
Active /
Inactive
Active /
Inactive
Active /
Inactive
Active /
Inactive
Group of 8 consecutive channels, except for the last group if this has less than eight channels.
Only available on channels 0, 1, 2, 3 and 8 of the module situated in slot 1.
Latching 0 or 1, event processing on rising edge (RE), or on falling edge (FE).
0.1 to 7.5 ms
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Key:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Discrete application configuration
Module reference
No. of inputs Associated task (1)
Function (2) Filtering
(group of 4 channels)
Type of logic
TSX DMZ 64DTK 32 (inputs) Mast / Fast
/ None
Normal or (3) 4 ms or (4) -
Networ k
Supply fault monitoring
Active /
Inactive
Group of 8 consecutive channels, except for the last group if this has less than eight channels.
Only available on channels 0, 1, 2, 3 and 8 of the module situated in slot 1.
Latching 0 or 1, event processing on rising edge (RE), or on falling edge (FE).
0.1 to 7.5 ms
Note: l l
Parameters in bold correspond to the parameters configured by default.
When a group of channels is not assigned to a task None ), the corresponding channels are not exchanged by the system.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
77
Discrete application configuration
Discrete output parameters
At a Glance The discrete output modules contain parameters per channel or per group of consecutive channels.
Parameters
Module reference
No. of outputs
TSX DSZ 04T22 4
TSX DSZ 08R5
TSX DSZ 08T2
TSX DSZ 08T2K 8
TSX DSZ 32R5
TSX DSZ 32T2
TSX DMZ 16DTK 8 (outputs)
TSX DMZ 28AR
TSX DMZ 28DR 12 (outputs)
TSX DMZ 28DT
8
8
32
32
The table below shows the parameters available for each discrete output module.
12 (outputs)
12 (outputs)
TSX DMZ 28DTK 12 (outputs)
TSX DMZ 64DTK 32 (outputs)
TSX DPZ 10D2A 2 (outputs)
Associated task (1)
Mast
Mast
Mast
Mast
Mast
Mast
Mast
Mast
Mast
Mast
Mast
Mast
Mast
/ Fast / None
/ Fast / None
/ Fast / None
/ Fast / None
/ Fast / None
/ Fast / None
/ Fast / None
/ Fast / None
/ Fast / None
/ Fast / None
/ Fast / None
/ Fast / None
/ Fast / None
Reactivate
Programmed /
Automatic
-
Programmed /
Automatic
Programmed /
Automatic
-
Programmed /
Automatic
Programmed /
Automatic
-
-
Programmed /
Automatic
Programmed /
Automatic
Programmed /
Automatic
-
Fallback mode Supply fault monitoring
Fallback to 0/
Maintain state
Active / Inactive
Active / Inactive Fallback to 0/
Maintain state
Fallback to 0/
Maintain state
Fallback to 0/
Maintain state
Active
Active
/ Inactive
/ Inactive
Active / Inactive Fallback to 0/
Maintain state
Fallback to 0/
Maintain state
Fallback to 0/
Maintain state
Fallback to 0/
Maintain state
Active
Active
Active
/ Inactive
/ Inactive
/ Inactive
Active / Inactive Fallback to 0/
Maintain state
Fallback to 0/
Maintain state
Fallback to 0/
Maintain state
Fallback to 0/
Maintain state
-
Active
Active
Active
Active
/ Inactive
/ Inactive
/ Inactive
/ Inactive
Key:
(1) Group of 8 consecutive channels, except for the last group if this has less than eight channels.
78
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Discrete application configuration
Note: l l
Parameters in bold correspond to the parameters configured by default.
When a group of channels is not assigned to a task None , the corresponding channels are not exchanged by the input/output system.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
79
Discrete application configuration
6.3
Configuration of discrete parameters
Presentation
Aim of this section
What's in this
Section?
This section presents the installation of different discrete I/O channel configuration parameters.
This Section contains the following Maps:
Topic
How to modify the Task parameter of a discrete module
How to modify the Monitoring the external supply parameter for a discrete module
How to modify the Functions parameter of a discrete module.
How to modify the Type of inputs parameter of a discrete module
How to modify the Network frequency parameter of a discrete module
How to modify the Filtering time parameter for 24 DCV inputs of a discrete module
How to modify the Fallback mode parameter of a discrete module
How to modify the Reactivation of outputs parameter of a discrete module.
How to parameterize the RUN/STOP input of a discrete module
How to parameterize the save program and %MW input of a discrete module
How to parameterize the alarm output of a discrete module
Page
80
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Discrete application configuration
How to modify the Task parameter of a discrete module
At a Glance This parameter defines the processor task in which inputs are acquired and outputs are updated.
The task is defined for 8 consecutive channels.
Note: If the module consists of a number of inputs which is not a multiple of 8, the last group will be made up of a number of channels between 1 and 7.
The possible choices are as follows: l l l the the
MAST
FAST
None
task
task
if the group of channels is not used.
It is advisable to deconfigure the groups of channels not used in the application. As a result, even if no connector is connected, the module will not indicate a fault.
Note: This parameter can only be modified in local mode.
Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the type of task assigned to the channels of a module.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
In the pull-down menu located in the Task column, click on the button for the required group of channels.
Result : a pull-down list appears.
MAST
MAST
FAST
None
3
4
Note : For discrete modules with more than 16 channels, use the scrollbar to access the different groups of channels.
Select the required task.
Note : Selecting None causes the group of channels in question and the following groups to be deconfigured, after the modification is confirmed.
Reconfiguration ( MAST or FAST selection) of a group of deconfigured channels will, after the modification is confirmed, cause the preceding nonconfigured groups to be reconfigured.
Confirm the deconfiguration or reconfiguration if necessary.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
81
Discrete application configuration
How to modify the Monitoring the external supply parameter for a discrete module
At a Glance
Procedure
This parameter defines the status (activated or deactivated) of external supply fault monitoring.
It works on groups of 16 consecutive channels.
By default checking is active (box checked).
The table below shows the procedure for activating or deactivating the Monitoring external supply fault function.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
For the required group of channels, click on the check box situated in the
Supply fault monitoring column.
Note: For discrete modules with more than 16 channels, use the scrollbar to access the different groups of channels.
82
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Discrete application configuration
How to modify the Functions parameter of a discrete module.
At a Glance This parameter enables the user to assign to the first four input channels (%l1.0 to l l
% l1.3) of a discrete module located in position 1, a specific function, such as: normal (no event associated with the channel), channel by channel latching,
This function is used to take into account a short duration pulse (less than one
PLC cycle time) in order to process it in the next cycle.
Acknowledgement of the pulse occurs when the input state changes: l l
Latch state 1: change from state 0 to state 1,
Latch state 0: change from state 1 to state 0.
Note: The switch to latching can be accessed in either local or online mode.
l channel by channel event processing,
This function is used to acknowledge events so that they are immediately processed (uninterrupted processing).
The possible choices are as follows: l event triggered on a rising edge (RE) of the pulse (state 0 -> state 1), l event triggered on a falling edge (FE) of the pulse (state 1 -> state 0),
Event entries are associated with a processing number ( Evt ). These numbers l l range from:
1 to 8 on the TSX 37-10 PLC,
0 to 15 on the TSX 37-21/22 PLC.
Note: The switching to event processing can be accessed in either local or online mode.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
83
Discrete application configuration
Procedure The table below shows the procedure for accessing the various functions.
Step
1
2
3
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the module situated in position 1.
Select the required channel.
In the Function column, double click on one of the first four cells of the channel to be parameterized.
Result : the properties dialog box appears.
Channel 3 function
1
ON
OFF
Normal
Latch state 0
Latch state 1
Channel processing
Rising
Falling
EVT 1
4
5
6
Select the required function.
If necessary, enter the event number Evti .
Repeat the operation for every channel to be configured (from step 2).
84
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Discrete application configuration
How to modify the Type of inputs parameter of a discrete module
At a Glance This parameter defines the type of inputs of the modules TSX DEZ 12D2 and
TSX DMZ 28DR .
It applies to all the module’s inputs.
l l
The possible choices are as follows: positive logic inputs: Sink (common to + supply sensors, negative logic inputs: Source (common to - supply sensors).
Note: This parameter can only be modified in local mode.
Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the type of inputs assigned to the module.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
Click on the Positive logic / Negative logic check box, located in the Type of input field.
Result : the type of input chosen will be assigned to the module in this way.
TSX DMZ 28DR [INPUTS: POSITION 01]
Configuration Inputs
Designation: 16E 24VCC+12S REL.BORN
Type of inputs
Positive logic
Negative logic
Sink Source
CAUTION: This action will mean the position of the switch on the card must be changed!
Note : Modifying the type of input implies: l the corresponding modification of the position of the switch situated on the module, l different input connections depending on whether the inputs are at Positive logic (sink) or at Negative logic (source).
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
85
Discrete application configuration
How to modify the Network frequency parameter of a discrete module
At a Glance This parameter is used to adapt alternating inputs to the network frequency (50 or
60 Hz) of the TSX DEZ 08A4 , TSX DEZ 08A5 and TSX DMZ 28AR modules
(inputs).
It applies to all the module’s inputs.
Note: The network frequency can only be modified in local mode.
Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the Network frequency assigned to the module.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
Click on the 50Hz / 60Hz check box located in the module zone of the
Network field.
Result : the network frequency chosen will therefore be assigned to the module.
Configuration
Network
50 Hz
60 Hz
TSX DMZ 28AR [INPUTS: POSITION 03]
Inputs
Designation: 16E 115VCA+12S REL.BORN
86
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Discrete application configuration
How to modify the Filtering time parameter for 24 DCV inputs of a discrete module
At a Glance This parameter defines the filtering period for the selected channel.
The filtering time is defined for a group of 4 consecutive channels and may vary between 0.1 and 7.5 ms in increments of 0.5 ms.
Note: The filtering time can only be modified in local mode.
Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the Filtering time parameter.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
In the pull-down menu located in the Filtering column, click on the button for the required group of channels.
Result : a pull-down list appears.
ChannelSymbol
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
Supply fault monitoring Task
Enable MAST
MAST
Filtering
4 ms
3 ms
3.5 ms
4 ms
4.5 ms
5 ms
4 ms
4 ms
Function
3 Select the required filtering period.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
87
Discrete application configuration
How to modify the Fallback mode parameter of a discrete module
At a Glance
Procedure
This parameter defines the fallback mode adopted by outputs when the PLC changes to Stop, in the event of a processor or rack fault.
The possible modes are as follows: l l l l
Fallback to 0 : the outputs are set at state 0,
Maintain state : the outputs remain in the state in which they were before the change to Stop.
This parameter applies: to all the outputs of a module for half format modules or mixed module outputs, to the even or odd position for a 32 output channel module.
The table below shows the procedure for defining the Fallback mode assigned to a group of channels.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
Click on the Fallback to 0 / Maintain state check box located in the module zone of the Fallback mode field.
Result : the fallback mode chosen will then be assigned to the module.
TSX DMZ 28AR [INPUTS: POSITION 06]
Configuration
Designation: 16E 115VCA+12S REL.BORN
Fallback mode on failure
Fallback to 0
Maintain state
Outputs
88
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Discrete application configuration
How to modify the Reactivation of outputs parameter of a discrete module.
At a Glance
Procedure
This parameter defines the reactivation mode of static outputs.
The possible modes are as follows: l Programmed : reactivation is executed by a PLC application command. In order to avoid closely spaced, repetitive reactivation, the module automatically allows l a period of 10 seconds between two reactivations,
Automatic : reactivation is carried out automatically every 10 seconds until the fault disappears.
l l
This parameter applies: to all the outputs of a module for half format modules or mixed module outputs, to the even or odd position for a 32 output channel module.
The table below shows the procedure for defining the reactivation of outputs.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
Click on the Programmed / Automatic check box located in the module zone of the Reactivation after short-circuit field.
Result : the reactivation of outputs chosen will then be assigned to the module.
TSX DMZ 28DT [OUTPUTS: POSITION 04]
Configuration
Designation: 16E 24VCC+12S 0.5A BORN
Fallback mode on failure
Fallback to 0
Maintain state
Reset after short-circuit
Programmed
Automatic
Outputs
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
89
Discrete application configuration
How to parameterize the RUN/STOP input of a discrete module
At a Glance The discrete input (%I1.8) can be parameterized to control the starting (Run) or stopping (Stop) of the execution of the application program.
Note: The change to Stop via the physical input %11.8 takes priority over a change to Run command from a terminal or network.
Procedure The table below shows the procedure for parameterizing the Run/Stop input.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
Double click on the 0 position.
Result : The processor configuration screen appears.
TSX 3722 [RACK 0 POSITION 0]
Configuration
Designation: Processor 3722
Operating Mode
%I1.8 Run/Stop
%Q2.0 Alarm
%I1.9 Save program and first %MWi
Auto. Start in Run
%MWi Reset on cold start
Memory Card
None
Tasks
MAST
Cyclic
Periodic
Watchdog
FAST
Period:
Watchdog
250
0 ms ms
FIPIO mode
Cycle time of network (calculated)
Controlled
Free ms
100
5 ms ms
FIPIO mode
Cycle time of network (calculated)
Controlled
Free ms
3 Check the %I1.8 Run/Stop box in the Operating mode field.
90
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Discrete application configuration
How to parameterize the save program and %MW input of a discrete module
At a Glance
Procedure
The discrete input (%11.9) can be assigned to the save program and %MWi internal words function.
Thus, when input %I1.9 is rising edge, this starts the RAM -> FLASH EPROM transfer of the program application and the %Mwi.
The table below shows the procedure for configuring the %I1.9 input as a save program and %MWi input.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
Double click on the 0 position.
Result : The processor configuration screen appears.
TSX 3722 [RACK 0 POSITION 0]
Configuration
Designation: Processor 3722
Operating Mode
%I1.8 Run/Stop
%Q2.0 Alarm
%I1.9 Save program and first %MWi
Auto. Start in Run
%MWi Reset on cold start
Memory Card
None
Tasks
MAST
Cyclic
Periodic
Watchdog
FAST
Period:
Watchdog
250
0 ms ms
FIPIO mode
Cycle time of network (calculated)
Controlled
Free ms
100
5 ms ms
FIPIO mode
Cycle time of network (calculated)
Controlled
Free ms
3 Check the %I1.9 Save program and first %MWi box in the Operating mode field.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
91
Discrete application configuration
How to parameterize the alarm output of a discrete module
At a Glance
Procedure
The discrete output (%Q2.0) can be assigned to the Alarm function.
Then, as soon as a blocking fault appears, output %Q2.0, normally at state 1, switches to state 0.
The table below shows the procedure for assigning the Alarm function to the output.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.
Double click on the 0 position.
Result : The processor configuration screen appears.
TSX 3722 [RACK 0 POSITION 0]
Configuration
Designation: Processor 3722
Operating Mode
%I1.8 Run/Stop
%Q2.0 Alarm
%I1.9 Save program and first %MWi
Auto. Start in Run
%MWi Reset on cold start
Memory Card
None
Tasks
MAST
Cyclic
Periodic
Watchdog
FAST
Period:
Watchdog
250
0 ms ms
FIPIO mode
Cycle time of network (calculated)
Controlled
Free ms
100
5 ms ms
FIPIO mode
Cycle time of network (calculated)
Controlled
Free ms
3 Check the %Q2.0 Alarm box in the Operating mode field.
92
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Debugging discrete modules
7
At a Glance
Aim of this chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter describes the Debug aspect of the installation of the discrete application.
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
Introduction to the debug function of a discrete module.
Description of the debug screen for a discrete module.
How to access the channels debug screen of a discrete module.
How to access the Diagnostics function for a discrete module
Accessing the forcing/unforcing function
How to access the SET and RESET commands
How to access the reactivation of outputs command
Maintain outputs for a discrete module
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
93
Debugging discrete modules
Introduction to the debug function of a discrete module.
Introduction The Debug function enables the user to view the parameters of each channel
(symbol, channel status, etc.) for each of the application's discrete input/output modules, and to access diagnostics and adjustment for the selected channel in the event of a fault being present.
The function also gives access to the module diagnostics in the event of a fault.
Note: This function can only be accessed in online mode.
94
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Debugging discrete modules
Description of the debug screen for a discrete module.
At a Glance
Illustration
The debug screen displays the value and state of each of the selected module's channels in real time. It is also used to access the channel commands (forcing of the input/output value, Set/Reset an output, etc.).
The debug screen looks like this:
1
TSX DMZ 64DTK [OUTPUTS . POSITION 02]
2
Debugging
Designation: 32E 24VCC+32S 0.1A CONN
Reactivation Global unforcing
Outputs
3
4
Channel
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
Symbol State
0
F1
F0
F0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Error
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
Fallback
STOP
STOP
DIAG…
Function
ALARM
Channel 4 commands x
Forcing
F4 Force to 0
F5 Force to 1
F6
Write
F7
Unforce
Set
F8 Reset
Description
Number
1
2
The table below shows the different elements in the debug screen and their functions.
Element
Title bar
Function
Indicates the reference of the selected module and its physical position in the PLC.
Module zone Enables the user to select: l parameter type: l l
Configuration ,
Debugging (diagnostics), can only be accessed in online mode.
l channel type (inputs or outputs) displayed, if the module in question contains both inputs and outputs or the position (even or odd) for 32 channel modules.
Displays the designation of the selected module.
Provides direct access to: l l the Global unforcing function for channels, the module diagnostics, if the module is faulty (shown by the indicator integrated in the diagnostics access button, DIAG , which turns red).
l the Reactivation of outputs function ( for static output modules).
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
95
Debugging discrete modules
Number
3
4
Element Function
Channel zone Displays, in real time, the value and status of each of the channels of the module. The
Symbol column displays the symbol associated with the channel when this has been defined by the user (via the variables editor).
Note: This zone also enables the user to display specific functions associated with the inputs %I1.0..%I1.3 and the output %Q2.0 of the discrete module.
Command zone
Gives access to the commands for a channel
Note: When a "counting application" function is associated with one of the first four inputs of the discrete module located in slot 1, an icon allows access to the adjustment and debug screens of this function (see).
96
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Debugging discrete modules
How to access the channels debug screen of a discrete module.
At a Glance
Procedure
This operation enables the user to access the debug screen for the channels of a discrete module.
The debug screen can only be accessed in online mode.
The table below shows the procedure for accessing the Debug function.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the hardware configuration screen.
Double click on the module to be configured or select the module then execute the command Service
→
Open module .
Result : The configuration screen for the selected module appears.
TSX DMZ 64DTK [OUTPUTS: POSITION 02]
Debugging
Designation: 32E 24VCC+32S 0.1A CONN
Reactivation Global unforcing
Outputs
DIAG…
Channel
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
12
13
14
8
9
10
11
Symbol State
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Error
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
ERR
Fallback
STOP
STOP
Function
ALARM
Channel 4 commands x
Forcing
F4 Force to 0
F5 Force to 1
F6
Write
Unforce
F7 Set
F8 Reset
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
97
Debugging discrete modules
How to access the Diagnostics function for a discrete module
At a Glance
Procedure
The module Diagnostics function displays the current faults, if there are any, classified according to their category: l l l internal faults (module failure), external faults (tripped output, sensor or actuator supply fault), other faults (module missing or switched off).
The DIAG indicator turns red to indicate a faulty module l in the configuration editor at rack level: l l the module position indicator, in the configuration editor at module level: l the Diag indicator.
The table below shows the procedure for accessing the module Diagnostics screen.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the module's debug screen.
Click on the Diag button in the module zone.
Result: The list of module faults appears.
Module Diagnostics
Internal faults External faults Other faults
Faulty channel(s)
OK
Note: If a configuration fault occurs, in the event of a major failure or missing module, the module diagnostics screen cannot be accessed. The following message then appears on the screen: Module is missing or different from that configured in this position .
98
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Debugging discrete modules
Accessing the forcing/unforcing function
Presentation
Procedure
This function is used to modify the status of all or part of a module's channels.
The status of a forced output is fixed and can only be modified by the application after unforcing.
Note: However, when a fault causes the outputs to fall back, the status of these channels takes the value set when the fallback mode parameter was configured.
The available commands are as follows: l for one or more channels: l forcing to 1, l l forcing to 0, l unforcing (when the selected channel(s) is (are) forced), for all channels of a module (when at least one channel is forced): l global unforcing of channels.
The table below shows the procedure for forcing or unforcing all or part of the channels of a module.
See
Modifying the configuration parameters of a discrete module's: General, p. 73
for multiple selection.
Step
1
2
3
Action for one channel
Access the module's debug screen.
In the Status column, double-click on the cell of the required channel (1).
Select the required function.
Action for all channels
Click on the Global unforcing button in the module zone.
-
Key:
(1) The Channel commands screen can also be accessed by double-clicking on the required channel and then left-clicking on the Command button.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
99
Debugging discrete modules
How to access the SET and RESET commands
At a Glance These commands are used to modify the state of a module's outputs to 0 (RESET) or 1 (SET).
Note: The state of the output assigned by one of these commands is temporary and can be modified at any time by the application when the PLC is in RUN.
Procedure The table below shows the procedure for assigning the value 0 or 1 to all or part of the channels of a module.
See (
Modifying the configuration parameters of a discrete module's: General, p. 73)
for multiple selection.
2
3
Step
1
Action for one channel
Access the module's debug screen.
In the Status column, double click on the cell of the required channel (1).
Select the required function.
Key:
(1) The Channel commands screen can also be accessed by double-clicking on the required channel and then left-clicking on the Command button.
100
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Debugging discrete modules
How to access the reactivation of outputs command
At a Glance
Procedure
If a fault has caused the outputs to trip, this command is used to reactivate all the outputs (configured in programmed reactivation) if no fault persists at their terminals.
The table below shows the procedure for reactivating tripped outputs.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the debug screen of the module in question.
Click on the Reactivate button, located in the module zone.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
101
Debugging discrete modules
Maintain outputs for a discrete module
At a Glance This check (red Stop indicator on) informs the user that, for a given output channel l l group, these outputs are not being correctly maintained by the PLC (fallback state).
The possible causes are as follows: processor fault, rack fault.
102
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Bits and words associated with discrete specific applications
8
Presentation
Aim of this chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter presents the different word and bit objects associated with discrete specific applications as well as their addressing mode.
This Chapter contains the following Sections:
Section
8.1
8.2
Topic
Addressing of discrete I/O module objects
Language objects associated with the discrete specific application
Page
103
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Language words and bits
8.1
Addressing of discrete I/O module objects
Addressing discrete input/output module objects
At a Glance
Illustration
Addressing of bit and word objects for input/output modules is defined in the part entitled Shared applications (See Addressing of language objects associated with
specific applications, p. 26).
This page describes the specific features linked to the discrete input/output modules.
Reminder of the principles of addressing:
% I, Q, M, K X, W or D
Symbol Object type Format x
Position i r
Channel no. Position
Specific values The table below shows the values specific to discrete input/output module objects.
i
Element Values Comment
0 to 63 or
MOD
MOD: channel reserved for management of the module and the parameters shared by all channels.
r 0 to 3 or
ERR
ERR: indicates a module or channel fault.
104
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
8.2
Language words and bits
Language objects associated with the discrete specific application
Presentation
Aim of this section
What's in this
Section?
This section presents the different language objects associated with the discrete specific application.
This Section contains the following Maps:
Topic
Implicit exchange objects
Exchange management: Module %MWx.MOD.0:Xj or channel %MWx.i.0:Xj exchanges in progress
Exchange management: Module %MWx.MOD.1:Xj or channel %MWx.i.1:Xj report
Explicit exchange objects: General
Explicit exchange objects: Status Module %MWx.MOD.2:Xj
Explicit exchange object: Command Word %MWxMOD.3:Xj
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
105
Language words and bits
Implicit exchange objects
At a Glance Exchanges for these objects are carried out automatically on each cycle of the task in which the module channels are configured.
Bit objects
Address
%Ix.i
The table below shows the different implicit exchange bit objects.
Function
Input channel bit
%Qx.i
%Ix.i.ERR
Output channel bit
Channel error bit
%Ix.MOD.ERR
Module error bit
Meaning when the bit is at state 1
Indicates for input channel i that the output of the sensor controlling the input is activated.
Indicates that output channel i is activated.
Indicates that input channel i is faulty.
Indicates that the module is faulty.
106
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Language words and bits
Exchange management: Module %MWx.MOD.0:Xj or channel %MWx.i.0:Xj exchanges in progress
At a Glance
Description
These word-type objects provide information on the module or channel i exchanges in progress.
They are updated automatically by the system.
The table below explains the meanings of the different bits in the word
%MWx.MOD.0
.
Address
%MWx.MOD.0:X0
%MWx.MOD.0:X1
Meaning for Xj = 1
Exchange of status words in progress on at least one channel of the module.
Exchange of command words in progress on at least one channel of the module.
Description
Example
The table below explains the meanings of the different bits in the word %MWx.i.0
.
Address
%MWx.i.0:X0
%MWx.i.0:X1
Meaning for Xj = 1
Exchange of status words in progress on channel i.
Exchange of command words in progress on channel i.
The example below shows one possible way in which this type of word can be used
(* Update request for channel 0 status words *)
(* for the module located at slot 3*)
(* if no exchange in progress on this channel *)
IF NOT %MW3.0:X0 THEN READ_STS %CH3.0;
END_IF;
Note: When the duration of the explicit exchange is shorter than the PLC task cycle time, the %MWx.i:X0 bit never switches to 1.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
107
Language words and bits
Exchange management: Module %MWx.MOD.1:Xj or channel %MWx.i.1:Xj report
At a Glance
Description
These word-type objects provide information on the exchange reports for the module or channel i.
They are updated automatically by the system.
The table below explains the meanings of the different bits in the word
%MWx.MOD.1
.
Address
%MWx.i.1:X0
%MWx.i.1:X1
Meaning for Xj = 1
Status parameter exchange error on at least one channel of the module.
Command parameter exchange error on at least one channel of the module.
Description
Example
The table below explains the meanings of the different bits in the word %MWx.i.1
.
Address
%MWx.i.1:X0
%MWx.i.1:X1
Meaning for Xj = 1
Status parameter exchange error on channel i.
Command parameter exchange error on channel i.
The example below shows one possible way in which this type of word can be used
(* Status error detected on module *)
(* located at slot 3 *)
IF NOT %MW3.MOD.0:X0 THEN READ_STS %CH3.MOD;
END_IF;
IF %MW3.MOD.1:X0 THEN SET %M100;
END_IF;
108
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Language words and bits
Explicit exchange objects: General
At a Glance Explicit exchange objects carry information (e.g. terminal block fault, module missing, etc.) and additional commands for advanced programming of application specific functions.
Note: The configuration constants %KWx.i.r, which are not documented in this manual, can only be accessed in read mode and correspond to the configuration parameters entered using the Configuration editor.
Explicit exchange objects are exchanged at the request of the user program using the following instructions: l l l l l l
READ_STS (read status words),
WRITE_CMD (write command words),
WRITE_PARAM
READ_PARAM
SAVE_PARAM
(write adjustment parameters),
(read adjustment parameters),
(save adjustment parameters),
RESTORE_PARAM (restore adjustment parameters).
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
109
Language words and bits
Explicit exchange objects: Status Module %MWx.MOD.2:Xj
At a Glance
Description
This word-type object provides information on the status of the module.
The table below explains the meanings of the different bits in the word:
%MWx.MOD.2
.
Address
%MWx.MOD.2:X0
%MWx.MOD.2:X1
%MWx.MOD.2:X2
%MWx.MOD.2:X3
%MWx.MOD.2:X4
%MWx.MOD.2:X5
%MWx.MOD.2:X6
%MWx.MOD.2:X7
%MWx.MOD.2:X8
%MWx.MOD.2:X9
%MWx.MOD.2:X10 to X15
5
6
3
4
1
2
Bit position Meaning for Xj = 1
0 Internal error Module inoperative.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Module Missing or Switched Off
7
8
9
10 to 15
Reserved.
Tripped Output.
Sensor or Actuator Supply Fault.
Reserved.
110
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Language words and bits
Explicit exchange object: Command Word %MWxMOD.3:Xj
At a Glance
Description
This word-type object is a command word. It is written by the application or from the
Debug screen for the reactivation command.
The table below explains the meanings of the different bits in the word:
%MWx.MOD.3
.
Meaning for Xj = 1 Address Bit position
%MWx.MOD.3:X0 0
%MWx.MOD.3:X1 to 3 1 to 3
%MWx.MOD.3:X4 4
%MWx.MOD.3:X5
%MWx.MOD.3:X6
%MWx.MOD.3:X7
%MWx.MOD.3:X8 to 11 8 to 11
%MWx.MOD.3:X12 12
%MWx.MOD.3:X13
%MWx.MOD.3:X14
%MWx.MOD.3:X15
5
6
7
13
14
15
Reactivation of tripped outputs.
Reserved.
Inhibiting the monitoring of the external supply fault for the channels 0 to 15.
Confirming the monitoring of the external supply fault for the channels 0 to 15.
Inhibiting the monitoring of the external supply fault for the channels 16 to 31.
Confirming the monitoring of the external supply fault for the channels 16 to 31.
Reserved.
Inhibiting the monitoring of the external supply fault for the channels 0 to 15.
Confirming the monitoring of the external supply fault for the channels 0 to 15.
Inhibiting the monitoring of the external supply fault for the channels 16 to 31.
Confirming the monitoring of the external supply fault for the channels 16 to 31.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
111
Language words and bits
112
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AS-i Bus
III
At a Glance
Aim of this part
What's in this part?
This part introduces the AS-i bus on PLC TSX37 and describes its implementation using the software PL7 Micro, Junior and Pro.
This Part contains the following Chapters:
Chapter
9
10
11
12
13
14
Chaptername
General introduction to the AS-i Bus
AS-i bus configuration
Debugging the AS-i bus
Bits and words associated with the AS-i function
AS-i operating mode
AS-i performance
Page
113
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AS-i Bus
114
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
General introduction to the AS-i
Bus
9
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter introduces the AS-i bus on PLC TSX37 and describes how to access the various application specific editors.
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
Introduction to the AS-i Bus
Architecture of the TSX SAZ 10 module
Structure of an AS-i slave
How to declare an AS-i communication module in the PLC rack
How to access the AS-i Bus configuration
Page
115
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AS-i Bus
Introduction to the AS-i Bus
At a Glance The AS-i (Actuator Sensor-Interface) Bus is used for the interconnection, on a single cable, of sensors/actuators at the lowest level of automation.
These sensors/actuators will be defined in the documentation as slave devices .
The implementation of the AS-i application requires you to define the physical context into which the application will be integrated (PLC rack, modules, AS-i slave devices connected on the bus) and then to complete the software implementation.
l l
This second aspect will be carried out from the different PL7 editors: either in local mode, or in connected mode; in this case modification is limited to certain parameters.
Implementation principles
Mode
Local
Local or connected
The table below shows the different implementation phases for the AS-i bus.
Phase
Declaration of module
Description
Installation in the rack slot.
Declaration of slave devices Selection for each device: l l of its slot number on the bus, of the slave type.
Input of the configuration parameters.
Configuration of the module channel (See AS-i bus
)
Confirmation on the module level.
Confirmation of the configuration parameters
(See Confirming the configuration of a module.,
Global confirmation of the application (See Globally reconfiguring an
Confirmation at application level.
Symbolization
Programming
Transfer
Documentation
Symbolization of the variables associated with the slave devices.
Programming of the functions carried out via the AS-i bus.
Transfer of the application onto the PLC.
Printing of the different information relating to the application.
116
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Mode
Connected
AS-i Bus
Phase
Debugging
Description
Debugging the application using: l debug help screens allowing you to view the slave connections, their parameters, etc.
l diagnostic screens allowing you to identify errors.
Note: The order defined above is given for information purposes. The PL7 software allows you to use the editors interactively in the required order. (However, you cannot use the data editor or the program editor without having first configured the module and the slave devices.)
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
117
AS-i Bus
Architecture of the TSX SAZ 10 module
At a Glance The TSX SAZ 10 module operates in master/slave mode. The master controls only the exchanges on the bus.
The AS-i standard defines several levels of service offered by the master: l Profile M0 - Minimum Master: the master only offers the configuration of the l slaves connected on the bus on power up and only input/output exchanges.
Profile M1 - Full Master: this profile covers all the functionality defined by the ASi standard, l Profile M2 - Reduced Master: this profile matches the functionality of profile M0 with the option of parameterizing the slaves.
Note: The TSX SAZ 10 module matches the M2 profile with the additional option of reading diagnostic information from the slaves.
The module includes data fields that allow you to manage the lists of slaves and the images of input / output data. This information is stored in volatile memory.
Illustration of the architecture
The figure below shows the architecture of the TSX SAZ 10 module.
TSX SAZ 10
Data images
1
I/O data
2 Current parameters
3
Configuration / Identification of
AS-i bus
AS-i bus
4
5
LDS
LAS
6
7
8
TSX 37
Non-volatile memory
Reference configuration
Reference parameters
LPS
118
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Description of the constituent elements
AS-i Bus
The table below shows the different elements making up the architecture of the TSX
SAZ 10 module.
2
3
6
7
4
5
8
Number
1
Element
I/O data
Current parameters
Configuration/
Identification
Description
Images of the 124 inputs and 124 outputs of the AS-i
Bus.
Image of the parameters of all the slaves.
This field contains all the I/O codes and the identification codes for all the slaves detected.
LDS
LAS
List of all slaves detected on the bus.
List of slaves activated on the bus.
Reference configuration Module reference configuration.
Reference parameters Parameters saved via PL7 or resulting from a backup.
LPS List of slaves provided on the bus and configured via
PL7.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
119
AS-i Bus
Structure of an AS-i slave
At a Glance
Structure illustration
The AS-i bus is used to interconnect 31 slave devices, each one having: l l l
4 input bits,
4 output bits,
4 parametering bits,
Thus the AS-i bus can manage a maximum number of 248 I/O.
Each slave has its own address and a profile (defines variables exchange).
The figure below shows the structure of an AS-i slave.
AS-i slave
1 I/O data
D3
D0
2 Parameters
P3
P0
3
Configuration/
Identification
AS-i bus
4 Address
Description of constituent elements
Number
1
2
3
4
The table below shows the different elements that make up the structure of an AS-i slave.
Element Description
Input/output data Input data is stored by the slave and made available for the AS-i master.
Output data is updated by the master module.
Parameters The parameters are used to control and switch internal operating modes to the sensor or the actuator.
Configuration/
Identification
Address
This field contains: l l the code which corresponds to I/O configuration, the slave identification (ID) code.
Physical address of slave.
Note : The operating parameters, address, configuration and identification data are saved in a non-volatile memory.
120
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AS-i Bus
How to declare an AS-i communication module in the PLC rack
Procedure This operation is used to declare an AS-i communication module in the PLC TSX 37 rack using software.
Step
1
Action
Double click on slot 4 of the base rack.
Result : The dialog box Add module appears:
Add module
Family:
Analog
Communication
Upcounting
Simulation
Alternating
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.0
1.5
Module:
TSX SAZ 10
TSX STZ 10
MODULE AS-Interface
MODULE XL7 - TSX 37l
OK
Cancel
2
3
4
C o m p t a g e
A n a
Select Communication in the Family field.
Select the reference of the module in the Module field.
Confirm the selection with OK .
Result : The module is declared in its slot; the latter is grayed out and contains the module reference.
0
TSX
3722
1
2
3
4
SAZ
10
5
6
Note : Only one TSX SAZ 10 communication module can be installed in a
TSX 37 configuration.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
121
AS-i Bus
How to access the AS-i Bus configuration
Procedure This operation is used to access the configuration of the AS-i Bus communication module.
Step
1
Action
Access the Hardware configuration screen
Result : The rack hardware configuration screen appears.
C o m p t a g e
A n a
0
TSX
3722
1
2
3
4
SAZ
10
5
6
2 Double click on the position of the communication module or select the module and execute the command Service
→
Open module .
Result : The hardware configuration screen for the module selected appears.
TSX SAZ 10 [POSITION 04]
Configuration
Designation: AS-Interface
CHANNEL 0:
Channel 0
AS-interface BUS
AS-interface configuration
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
MAST
General
Automatic Addressing
Configuration of slave
Profile
Comment
0
1
2
3
Input Symbol
1
2
Output
0
3
Symbol
Fallback mode on failure
Maintain Fallback to 0
2
3
Parameters
0
1
122
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AS-i bus configuration
10
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This Chapter describes the Configuration aspect for installing the AS-i bus.
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
Description of the configuration screen for an AS-i communication module
How to define a slave device on the AS-i bus
How to modify the software configuration of the AS-i Bus
How to access the description of an AS-i slave
How to define a new slave profile in the standard AS-I catalogue
How to modify AS-i slave general parameters: Automatic addressing
How to modify AS-i slave general parameters: Fallback mode
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
123
AS-i bus configuration
Description of the configuration screen for an AS-i communication module
At a Glance
Illustration
The configuration screen of the AS-i module gives access to the parameters associated with the module and the slave devices.
This screen allows display and modification of parameters in local mode, and also debugging in connected mode.
1
TSX SAZ 10 [POSITION 04]
Configuration
Designation: AS-Interface MODULE
2
3
4
CHANNEL 0:
Channel 0
AS-interface BUS
AS-interface configuration
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
MAST
General parameters
Automatic Addressing
Configuration of slave 1:
Profile
0
1
2
3
Comment
Input Symbol
Output
0
1
2
3
Symbol
Fallback mode on failure
Maintain Fallback to 0
1
2
3
Parameters
0
5
6
Description The table below shows the different elements of the configuration screen and their functions.
Number Element
1 Title bar
2 Command zone
Function
Indicates the reference of the selected module and its physical position in the rack.
Allows the selection of the parameter type: l l
Configuration
Debugging
,
(diagnostic), only accessible in connected mode.
Displays the designation of the selected module.
The display of this zone is optional. The selection is made by using the command
View
→
Module zone .
124
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AS-i bus configuration
Number
3
4
5
6
Element
Channel zone
AS-i configuration zone
General parameters zone
Slave configuration zone
Function
Allows selection of the task in which the information coming from the AS-i communication channel will be scanned: l l
MAST
FAST
task,
task.
The display of this zone is optional. The selection is made by using the command
View
→
Channel zone .
Allows: l l viewing of the slave devices connected to the bus, definition of a new configuration (adding, modifying or deleting slave devices).
Allows the viewing and selection of general parameters applied to all the slaves on the bus.
l l
Automatic addressing,
Fallback mode.
Allows viewing of the data associated with the selected slave, such as: l l l l its profile, a comment, its AS-i symbol (the symbols are defined using the variables editor), its parameters.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
125
AS-i bus configuration
How to define a slave device on the AS-i bus
At a Glance The PL7 software offers a catalogue, which regroups all of the AS-i slaves that are available. This catalogue is structured in families (e.g.: Inductive detectors).
The list of slave device families contains two distinct elements: l l
Non-specialized products,
Private family.
Selection of a non-specialized product allows the selection of an AS-i profile amongst 240 possibilities.
Selecting Private family gives the user the possibility of managing a specific AS-i device catalogue file via its programming terminal.
Note: An application using the AS-i products from the Private Family catalogue is always linked to the usage of this same private family catalogue.
Procedure This operation supports the declaration of a slave device on the AS-i bus.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the AS-i module’s hardware configuration screen.
In the field AS-interface configuration , double click in the cell corresponding to the new slave’s (1 to 31) host slot number or select the said cell and then carry out the Edit
→
Add a slave command.
Result : The screen Associate a profile appears.
Associate Profile
AS-interface profile families
Code AS-i family name
9
1
8
11
12
Capacitive detectors
Inductive proximity sensors
Photo-electric detectors
Private family
IP20 connection interface
AS-interface profile catalog
AS-i Name Comment
View
Add
Modify
Details
Ok Cancel
126
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Step
3
AS-i bus configuration
Action
In the Family Name field select the required family.
Result : The Profile catalogue associated with the selected family appears.
AS-interface profile families
AS-i AS-i family name
7
8
9
10
11
Control station
Détecteurs capacitifs
Photo-electric detectors
Interface E/S
Détecteurs inductifs
Associate a profiile
AS-i -Catalog : Photo-electric detectors
1.1
Nom
XUJ-K063539AS
1.1
XUJ-K103534AS
1.1
XUJ-K123538AS
1.1
XUJ-K703538AS
1.1
XUJ-ZAS1
Commentaire
Photo elect. detect. reflex
Photo elect. detect. Thru beam
Photo elect. detect bs 1.2m
Photo elect. detect bs 0.7m
Back over for XUJ detectors
Ok Cancel
View
Add
Modify
Détails
4
5
In the Profile catalogue select the required device.
Confirm the selection with OK .
Result : The slave device is defined in its slot, the reference of the connected device appears opposite the number of the slave.
AS-interface configuration
1
2
3
4
5
P XUJ-K1233538AS
6 To connect other slave devices to the AS-i bus, repeat the procedure from step
2.
127
AS-i bus configuration
How to modify the software configuration of the AS-i Bus
At a Glance
Procedure for deleting a slave
The PL7 software offers, from the configuration screen of the AS-i module, a set of functions which allow you to easily modify, in local mode, the software configuration of the AS-i Bus.
This operation is used to delete a slave declared on the AS-i Bus.
Step
1
2
Action
Select the slave to be deleted.
Select the command Edit
→
Delete AS-i slave .
Procedure for moving a slave
This operation is used to move a slave declared on the AS-i Bus.
Step
1
2
Action
Select the slave to be moved.
Select the command Edit
→
Modify AS-i slave address .
Result: The following dialog box appears.
Modify address
Current address:
Addresses available:
OK
3
1
5
6
2
4
7
8
9
Cancel
3
4
Select the new address.
Confirm using OK .
128
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AS-i bus configuration
How to access the description of an AS-i slave
At a Glance
Definition of a profile
Details of a profile
The PL7 software allows access to all the information relating to an AS-i device such as: l l the definition of a profile, the details of a profile.
l l l l l
A profile is defined by: its name, a comment (optional), identifiers (IO, ID), a number of inputs and/or outputs, operation parameters.
The Detail function allows access, for a given slave, to all the information presented in the catalog file.
Profile Details r4e_01
Reference:
User module active
Supplier:
AS- profilei:
I/O Error:
INPUTS:
XZ-SDA10D2
Enable the connection of 4 sensors.
PNP type input.
Maximum current used by 4 sensors = 100mA
Version:
Télémécanique
0.0
PNP type
D0: I-1 Sensor signal 1 (pins 4-2)
D1: I-2 Sensor signal 2 (pins 4-2)
D2: I-3 Sensor signal 3 (pins 4-2)
OK
Procedure for accessing information on a profile
The following table shows the procedure for displaying the characteristics of a slave device.
Step Action
1 Access the AS-i module’s hardware configuration screen.
2
3
Double click on the required slave.
Result:: The window Associate a profile displays and highlights the device in question
Click on the button: l l
View to access definition information,
Detail to access all the information.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
129
AS-i bus configuration
How to define a new slave profile in the standard AS-I catalogue
At a Glance The PL7 software offers the possibility to define a slave profile, which was not provided, in the standard catalogue.
The new profile, defined in this way, is added to the catalogue in Private family .
This profile can then be used as a standard catalogue profile.
Note: A profile cannot be deleted, only their name and comment can be changed.
Procedure The following table presents the procedure for defining a slave profile, which is not provided in the standard catalogue.
Step
1
2
3
Action
Access the AS-i module’s hardware configuration screen.
Double click in a slave’s host cell (1 to 31).
Result : The screen Associate a profile appears.
Select Private family in the field Family name .
Result : The Profile catalog linked to the selected family appears.
Associate Profile
AS-interface profile families
Code AS-i family name
9
1
8
11
12
Capacitive detectors
Inductive proximity sensors
Photo-electric detectors
Private family
IP20 connection interface
AS-interface profile catalog
A.4
AS-i Name
Sensor 1I 4Q
Comment
View
Add
Modify
Details
Ok Cancel
4
5
Click on the button Add .
Enter: l l the name of the new profile, a comment (optional).
130
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Step
6
7
8
AS-i bus configuration
Action
Select: l l the the
IO
ID
code (corresponds to the input/output configuration),
code (identifier).
For each parameter define: l l the system’s acknowledgement (box checked), a label (optional).
Confirm the introduction of a new profile using Confirm .
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
131
AS-i bus configuration
How to modify AS-i slave general parameters: Automatic addressing
At a Glance Each slave on the AS-i bus must be assigned (via configuration) a unique physical address. This must be the same as the one declared in PL7.
PL7 software offers an automatic slave addressing utility so that an AS-i console does not have to be used.
The automatic addressing utility, which can be accessed via PL7, is used for: l l replacing a faulty slave (See
inserting a new slave (See How to insert a slave device into an existing AS-i
Automatic replacement of a faulty AS-i slave,
Note: A new configuration with automatic addressing will not be accepted if one or more slaves with a 0 address are on the bus. In this case, the Configuration refused by module message appears.
Procedure The table below shows the procedure for setting the Automatic addressing parameter.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the AS-i communication module’s configuration screen.
Click on the Automatic addressing check box found in the General parameters zone.
Result : The Automatic addressing utility will be activated (box checked) or disabled (box not checked).
General parameters
Automatic addressing
Fallback mode on failure
Fallback: Maintain
Note : By default, the Automatic addressing parameter has been selected in the configuration screen.
132
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AS-i bus configuration
How to modify AS-i slave general parameters: Fallback mode
At a Glance This parameter sets the fallback mode which slave outputs take on while switching to STOP mode or if there is a PLC fault.
Possible modes are: l Fallback to 0 : AS-i slave outputs which are present on the bus are set to 0 (%Q l objects are not modified),
Maintain state : AS-i slave outputs remain in the state they were before STOP mode was engaged.
Note: The fallback mode for slaves which do not have a watchdog (AS-i bus monitoring function) is not guaranteed in case of an AS-i bus fault, or AS-i power supply failure. For slaves with a watchdog, the fallback position is preset within the device.
Procedure The table below shows the procedure for setting the Fallback mode assigned to slave device outputs.
Step
1
2
Action
Access the AS-i communication module’s configuration screen.
Click on the Fallback to 0 / Maintain state check-box found in the General parameters zone, in the Fallback mode on fault field.
Result : The fallback mode selected will therefore be assigned to the slave device.
General parameters
Automatic addressing
Fallback mode on failure
Fallback: Maintain
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
133
AS-i bus configuration
134
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Debugging the AS-i bus
11
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This Chapter describes the Debug aspect of the AS-i bus.
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
Introduction to the Debug function
Description of the debug screen for an AS-i module
How to access functionality in the module diagnostics and channel diagnostics for an AS-i device
Page
Displaying the slaves’ status
How to access adjustment of an AS-i device’s parameters
How to access the AS-i channels’ forcing/unforcing function
How to access the SET and RESET commands of the AS-i channels
Automatic replacement of a faulty AS-i slave
How to insert a slave device into an existing AS-i configuration.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
135
Debugging the AS-i bus
Introduction to the Debug function
At a Glance The Debug function is used for each AS-i communication module present in the application: l l to display the slave state (connection, parameters etc.), to access the adjustment function for the selected channel (channel forcing etc.).
The function also accesses module diagnostics in the event of a fault.
Note: This function is only available in online mode.
136
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Debugging the AS-i bus
Description of the debug screen for an AS-i module
At a Glance
Illustration
The debug screen dynamically displays the status of the AS-i module and the devices connected on the bus.
It is also used to access slave parameter adjustment and channel commands
(forcing the value of an input or output, Set/Reset of an output, etc.).
The debug screen looks like this:
1 TSX SAZ 10 [POSITION 04]
Debugging
Designation: AS-Interface MODULE Version: 1.0
2
3
4
Channel 0: ASi
Channel 0
AS-interface BUS
AS-interface configuration
D
D
D
7
8
5
6
3
4
1 P
2 P
P
D
9
10 P
XZ-SDA22D32
XAL-S2003
LF2K09BW#**C
XZ-SDA22D32
COM RUN ERR IO
MAST
Slave no.: 1
Profile
Projected: 3.0
Detected: 3.0
%I
Channel
0
1
2
3
%Q
0
1
2
3
ASi Symbol
Not handled
Not handled
Not handled
Not handled
DIAG...
DIAG...
Status
0
1
0
0
Parameters (3-0)
Value: 1111
Modif PARAM
Global unforcing
Channel action
F4 Force to 0
F5 Force to 1
F6
F7
Unforce
Set
F8 Reset
5
Description
Number Element
1 Title bar
2
3
Module zone
The table below shows the different elements of the debug screen and their functions.
Channel zone
Function
Indicates the reference of the module selected and its physical position in the
PLC.
Allows the selection of the parameter type: l l
Configuration
Debugging
,
(diagnostic), only accessible in connected mode.
Displays the status of the module lights COM , RUN , ERR , I/O .
Provides direct access to the module diagnostics when a module is faulty
(signaled by the light integrated in the diagnostics access button DIAG , which turns red).
Provides direct access to the channel diagnostics when a channel is faulty
(signaled by the light integrated in the diagnostics access button DIAG , which turns red).
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
137
Debugging the AS-i bus
Number Element
4
5
AS-i configuration zone
Slave zone
Function
Displays the slave devices connected to the bus.
Displays the status of the slave channels and gives access to the debug functions.
138
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Debugging the AS-i bus
How to access functionality in the module diagnostics and channel diagnostics for an AS-i device
At a Glance
Procedure for accessing the module diagnostics
The functions of the module or channel diagnostics display the current errors in which are classed according to their category: l internal errors (internal software errors, communication error with the processor, configuration, parametering or command error), l l external errors(slave device failed, AS-i supply switched off, terminal error, difference between physical configuration and PL7 configuration), other errors (module absent or switched off).
A faulty module becomes apparent when certain lights change to red, such as: l in the configuration editor at rack level: l the module position light, l in the configuration editor at module level: l the lights RUN , ERR and I/O , l the light DIAG .
A faulty channel becomes apparent when certain lights change to red, such as: l in the configuration editor at rack level: l l the module position light, in the configuration editor at channel level: l the light DIAG .
The following table presents the procedure to access the screen Module diagnostics .
Step
1
2
Action
Access the AS-i module’s hardware configuration screen.
Click on the button DIAG situated in the module zone.
Result : The list of module errors appears.
Internal faults
Module Diagnostics
External faults Other faults
OK
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
139
Debugging the AS-i bus
Procedure for accessing the channel diagnostics
The following table presents the procedure for accessing the screen Channel diagnostics .
Step
1
2
Action
Access the AS-i module’s hardware configuration screen.
Click on the button DIAG situated in the channel zone.
Result : The list of channel errors appears.
Internal faults
Channel Diagnostics
External faults
Device error
Other faults
Configuration error
OK
140
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Debugging the AS-i bus
Displaying the slaves’ status
At a Glance The lower part of the communication module’s debugging screen is reserved for diagnostics of the AS-i bus.
The slave devices connected to the bus are displayed in the AS-i Configuration zone. On each side of the slave number, two different icons are displayed, indicating that the slave was specified or detected.
Displaying slave status
Case
1
2
3
4
For each slave device, one of the following four cases can occur:
Illustration
Slave status:
AS-interface configuration
D 1
2
3
4
5
P XAL-S2003
Slave status:
AS-interface configuration
D 1
2
3
4
5
P XAL-S2003
Slave status:
AS-interface configuration
1
2
3
4
5
P XAL-S2003
Slave status:
AS-interface configuration
XAL-S2003 D 1
2
3
4
5
Explanation
The slave P specified in configuration and the detected slave D are identical.
The slave P specified in configuration and the detected slave D are not identical. The slave is declared faulty (1).
A slave P is specified at configuration but no slave is detected.
The slave is declared faulty (1).
An additional slave, not specified at configuration, is connected to the bus. The slave is declared faulty (1).
Key :
(1) When a slave is faulty, the icons situated beside the number as well as the button DIAG turn to red.
Note : The Profile field in the Slave zone of the debugging screen allows you to check if the profiles of the specified
( Projected ) slave and the Detected slave are really identical.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
141
Debugging the AS-i bus
How to access adjustment of an AS-i device’s parameters
At a Glance
Procedure
The debugging screen of an AS-i module allows, amongst other things, access to modification of a slave’s parameters.
The following table shows the procedure for modifying the parameters of a slave device declared faulty.
Step Action
1 Access the AS-i module’s debugging screen.
2 Select the slave with the error.
Result : In the slave zone of the debugging screen, it is possible to read all the information relating to the selected slave.
AS-interface configuration
D
D
1 P
2 P
3
XZ-SDA22D32
XAL-S2003
Slave no : 1
Profile
Projected
Detected
3.0
3.0
D
D
9
10
4
5
6
7
8
P
P
LF2K09BW#**C
XZ-SDA22D32
%I
%Q
Chan.
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
Asi Symbol
Not handled
Not handled
Not handled
Not handled
Parameters (3-0)
Value : 1111
Modify PARAM
0
1
0
0
State
Global unforcing
Chan. action
F4 Force to 0
F5
F6
F7
F8
Force to 1
Unforce
Set
Reset
3 Click on the button Modif PARAM situated in the slave zone’s Parameters field.
Result : The window Parameter modification appears.
TSX SAY 100 [RACK 0 POSITION 8]
Modify Parameters slave no : 1
Mise au point
Parameters
Désignation : COUPLEUR AS-Interface Version :
0 Unused 2
1
Voie 0 : Asi
Unused
Voie 0
BUS As-Interface
Send
3
Cancel entry
AS-interface configuration
D
D
XZ-SDA22D32
XAL-S2003
3
4
1 P
2 P
Slave no : 1
Profile
Projected:
Unused
RUN
Flash On/Off
Detected: 3.0
Chan.
3.0
Close
MAST
AS-i Symbol
ERR IO
Parameters (3-0)
Value : 1111
Modif PARAM
State
DIAG...
DIAG...
Global unforcing
Chan. action
4 Modify the required parameters.
5 Click on Send to recognize the new values.
142
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Debugging the AS-i bus
How to access the AS-i channels’ forcing/unforcing function
Introduction This function supports the modification of the state of the channels, which are linked to the AS-i slave.
The different commands, which are available are: l for a channel: l l forcing to 0, l forcing to 1, l unforcing.
for all the channels (when at least one channel is forced): l global unforcing.
Procedure The following table shows the procedure to follow to force or unforce the channels linked to an AS-i slave.
Step Action for a channel
1 Access the AS-i interface card’s debugging screen.
2 Select a slave in the zone AS-i Configuration .
3 Select the channel to modify in the slave zone table.
Result : It is possible to modify the channel using the buttons situated in the field Channel action .
Slave no : 1
Profile
Projected 3.0
Parameters (3-0)
Value : 1111
Modify PARAM
Detected
3.0
Global unforcing
%I
%Q
Chan.
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
Asi Symbol
Not handled
Not handled
Not handled
Not handled
0
1
State
0
Chan. action
F4 Force to 0
F5
F6
F7
F8
Force to 1
Unforce
Set
Reset
Action for a group of channels
Click on the button Global unforcing found in the slave zone.
4 Select the required function (buttons Force to 0 or Force to 1 in the field Channel Action .
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
143
Debugging the AS-i bus
How to access the SET and RESET commands of the AS-i channels
At a Glance
Procedure
These commands allow the assignment of the values 0 (RESET) or 1 (SET) to the channels of an AS-i slave.
The status of the output affected by one of these commands is temporary and can be modified at any time by the application.
The following table presents the procedure for assigning a value of 0 or 1 to the selected AS-i slave’s channels.
Step
1
2
3
Action
Access the AS-i module’s debugging screen.
Select a slave in the zone AS-i Configuration .
Select the channel to be modified in the Slave zone table.
Result : It is possible to modify the channel using the buttons situated in the field Channel action .
Slave no : 1
Profile
Projected 3.0
%I
%Q
Detected
Chan.
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
3.0
Asi Symbol
Not handled
Not handled
Not handled
Not handled
Parameters (3-0)
Value : 1111
Modify PARAM
0
1
State
0
Global unforcing
Chan. action
F4 Force to 0
F5
F6
F7
F8
Force to 1
Unforce
Set
Reset
4 Select the required function (buttons Set or Reset ) in the field Channel action .
144
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Debugging the AS-i bus
Automatic replacement of a faulty AS-i slave
Principle When a slave has been declared faulty, it can be automatically replaced with a slave of the same type.
This happens without the AS-i bus having to stop, and without any particular manipulation since the configuration mode Automatic addressing utility is active
(see
How to modify AS-i slave general parameters: Automatic addressing, p. 132).
Two options are available: l The replacement slave is programmed with the same address using the pocket programmer, and has the same profile as the faulty slave. It will then be automatically inserted into the list of detected slaves (LDS) and list of active slaves (LAS).
l the replacement slave is blank (address 0, new slave) and has the same profile as the faulty slave. It will automatically assume the address of the replaced slave, and will then be inserted into the list of detected slaves (LDS) and the list of active slaves (LAS).
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
145
Debugging the AS-i bus
How to insert a slave device into an existing AS-i configuration.
At a Glance
Procedure
It is possible to insert a device into an existing AS-i configuration without having to use the pocket programmer.
This operation is possible as soon as: l the service Automatic addressing of the configuration mode is active (See How
to modify AS-i slave general parameters: Automatic addressing, p. 132),
l l l l a single slave is absent in the physical configuration, the slave which is to be inserted is projected in the PL7 configuration, the slave has the profile expected by the configuration, the slave has the address 0.
Therefore the AS-i interface card will automatically assign to the slave the value predefined in the configuration.
The following table presents the procedure for making the automatic insertion of a new slave effective.
2
3
Step
1
Action
Add the new slave in the configuration screen in local mode.
Do a configuration transfer to the PLC in connected mode.
Physically link the new slave with address 0 to the AS-i bus.
Note: It is possible to modify an application by carrying out the above manipulation as many times as necessary.
146
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Bits and words associated with the AS-i function
12
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This Chapter introduces the different word and bit objects associated with the AS-i function, as well as how to address them.
This Chapter contains the following Sections:
Section
12.1
12.2
Topic
Addressing objects associated with the AS-i function
Language objects associated with the AS-i function
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
147
Bits and words associated with the AS-i function
12.1
Addressing objects associated with the AS-i function
Addressing language objects associated with slave devices connected on the
AS-i Bus
At a Glance
Illustration
The addressing of bit and word objects associated with application specific tasks is defined in the part entitled Shared applications.
This page introduces the specific features linked to the AS-i function.
Reminder of the principles of addressing:
% I or Q
Symbol Type of object
\ 4.0
TSX SAZ 10 channel/ module address
\ n i
Number of slavesPosition of bit
Specific values The table below gives the values specific to the AS-i slave objects.
i
Element n
Values
0 to 31
0 to 3
Comment
Slot 0 cannot be configured.
-
148
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
12.2
Bits and words associated with the AS-i function
Language objects associated with the AS-i function
At a Glance
Aim of this
Section
What's in this
Section?
This Section introduces the different language objects associated with the AS-i function.
This Section contains the following Maps:
Topic
Implicit exchange objects associated with the AS-i function
Managing exchanges: Module %MW4.MOD.0:Xj or channel %MW4.0.0:Xj exchanges in progress
Managing exchanges: Module %MW4.MOD.1:Xj or channel %MW4.0.1:Xj report
Explicit exchange objects: General
Explicit exchange objects: Channel status %MW4.0.2:Xj to %MW4.0.22:Xj
Explicit exchange object: Channel command %MW4.0.23:Xj
Explicit exchange objects: Adjustment parameters %MW4.0.24 to
%MW4.0.39
Explicit exchange objects: Status %MW4.MOD.2:Xj
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
149
Bits and words associated with the AS-i function
Implicit exchange objects associated with the AS-i function
At a Glance
Bit objects
Address
%I4.0.ERR
%I4.MOD.ERR
%I4.0
%I4.0.i
%I\4.0\.n.i
%Q\4.0\.n.i
%Q4.0
%Q4.0.i
These are the objects whose exchanges are carried out automatically on each cycle of the task in which the AS-i function is configured.
The table below shows the different implicit exchange bit objects.
Function
Channel error bit
Module error bit
Input validation
Reserved input channel bit output channel bit
Reserved
Reserved
Meaning when the bit is set to 1
Indicates a supply fault or a slave missing on the AS-i bus.
Indicates the module is faulty.
Indicates that all inputs are valid.
Note: When this bit is set to 0, it indicates that at least one input is not valid: offline mode or channel error.
-
Indicates that the input channel i of the device n is activated.
Indicates that the output channel i of the device n is activated.
-
-
Word objects
Address
%IW4.0
%IW4.0.1
%IW4.0.2
%IW4.0.3
The table below shows the different implicit exchange word objects.
Function
List of slaves in error
List of activated slaves (LAS)
Meaning when Xj = 1 (j = position of the bit in the word) j = 0 to 15 -> respectively slave 0 to 15 in error or missing.
j = 0 to 15 -> respectively slave 16 to 31 in error or missing.
j = 0 to 15 -> respectively slave 0 to 15 activated.
j = 0 to 15 -> respectively slave 16 to 31 activated.
150
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Bits and words associated with the AS-i function
Managing exchanges: Module %MW4.MOD.0:Xj or channel %MW4.0.0:Xj exchanges in progress
At a Glance
Description
These word type objects carry information about the module or channel exchanges in progress.
They are updated automatically by the system.
The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the word %MW4.MOD.0
.
Address
%MW4.MOD.0:X0
%MW4.MOD.0:X1
Meaning when Xj = 1
Exchange of status words in progress on the module channel.
Exchange of command words in progress on the module channel.
Description
Example
The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the word %MW4.0.0
.
Address
%MW4.0.0:X0
%MW4.0.0:X1
Meaning when Xj = 1
Exchange of status words in progress on the AS-i channel.
Exchange of command words in progress on the AS-i channel.
The example below shows a possible use for this type of word.
(* Request for update of the status words of channel 0 *)
(* of the AS-i module if no exchange is in progress on this channel*)
IF NOT %MW4.0:X0 THEN READ_STS %CH4.0;
END_IF;
Note: When the period of the explicit exchange is shorter than the cycle time of the
PLC task, the bit %MW4.0:X0 never changes to 1.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
151
Bits and words associated with the AS-i function
Managing exchanges: Module %MW4.MOD.1:Xj or channel %MW4.0.1:Xj report
At a Glance
Description
These word type objects contain information on the module or channel exchange reports.
They are updated automatically by the system.
The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the word %MW4.MOD.1
.
Address
%MW4.MOD.1:X0
%MW4.MOD.1:X1
Meaning when Xj = 1
Status parameter exchange error on channel 0 of the module.
Command parameter exchange error on channel 0 of the module.
Description The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the word %MW4.0.1
.
Address
%MW4.0.1:X0
%MW4.0.1:X1
Meaning when Xj = 1
Status parameter exchange error on AS-i channel.
Command parameter exchange error on AS-i channel.
Example The example below shows a possible use for this type of word.
(* Detection of a status error on the module *)
(* situated in slot 4 *)
IF NOT %MW4.MOD.0:X0 THEN READ_STS %CH4.MOD;
END_IF;
IF %MW4.MOD.1:X0 THEN SET %M100;
END_IF;
152
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Bits and words associated with the AS-i function
Explicit exchange objects: General
At a Glance Explicit exchange objects carry information (e.g.: bus operation, slave status, etc.) and additional commands to carry out advanced programming of the AS-i function.
Note: The configuration constants %KW4.0.r, not documented in this manual, can only be accessed in read mode and correspond to the configuration parameters entered using the Configuration editor.
l l l l l l
Explicit exchange objects are exchanged at the request of the user program using the instructions:
READ_STS (read status words)
WRITE_CMD (write command words),
WRITE_PARAM
READ_PARAM
SAVE_PARAM
(write adjustment parameters),
(read adjustment parameters),
(save adjustment parameters),
RESTORE_PARAM (restore adjustment parameters).
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
153
Bits and words associated with the AS-i function
Explicit exchange objects: Channel status %MW4.0.2:Xj to %MW4.0.22:Xj
At a Glance These word type objects provide information on all the slaves present on the AS-i
Bus.
Description of the word
%MW4.0.2
Address
%MW4.0.2:X0
%MW4.0.2:X1
%MW4.0.2:X2
%MW4.0.2:X3
%MW4.0.2:X4
%MW4.0.2:X5
%MW4.0.2:X6
%MW4.0.2:X7
The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the word
Function
Standard status
%MW4.0.2
Meaning when Xj = 1
Reserved
One or several slaves in error.
Line error (supply switched off or terminal block error).
Physical configuration different to the PL7 configuration.
Internal software error.
Reserved
Error communicating with the processor.
Parametering or command configuration error.
.
Description of the word
%MW4.0.3
Address
%MW4.0.3:X0
%MW4.0.3:X1
%MW4.0.3:X2
%MW4.0.3:X3
%MW4.0.3:X4
%MW4.0.3:X5
%MW4.0.3:X6
%MW4.0.3:X7
%MW4.0.3:X8
The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the word
Function
AS-i specific status
Meaning when Xj = 1
Correct configuration.
Slave 0 present.
Automatic addressing active.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Reserved.
AS-i supply failed.
Offline phase active.
Reserved.
%MW4.0.3
.
154
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Bits and words associated with the AS-i function
Description of the words
%MW4.0.4 and
%MW4.0.5
Address
%MW4.0.4:Xj
%MW4.0.5:Xj
The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the words
%MW4.0.5
.
Function Meaning when Xj = 1
List of detected slaves LDS j = 0 to 15 -> respectively slave 0 to 15 detected.
j = 0 to 15 -> respectively slave 16 to 31 detected.
%MW4.0.4
and
Description of the words
%MW4.0.6 to
%MW4.0.21
Address
%MW4.0.6 to
%MW4.0.21
The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the words
%MW4.0.21
.
%MW4.0.6
to
Function
I/O and ID configuration for all detected slaves
Meaning
Words 6 to 21 -> respectively devices 0-1, 2-3, ..., 28-29, 30-31.
The least significant bytes relate to the slaves with an even address.
The most significant bytes relate to the slaves with an odd address.
For each byte: bit 0-3 = configuration code for input/output (I/O) channels, bit 4-7 = identification code (ID).
Description of the word
%MW4.0.22
Address
%MW4.0.22
The table below gives the meaning of the word
Function
Parametering data of last slave parameterized.
%MW4.0.22
.
Meaning
Contains the reply (value of the parameters sent) from the last slave parameterized. This allows you to verify via PL7 that the slave has received them correctly.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
155
Bits and words associated with the AS-i function
Explicit exchange object: Channel command %MW4.0.23:Xj
At a Glance
Description
This type of object word is used to manage the AS-i master’s change to Offline mode
(See
AS-i offline operating mode, p. 164).
The table below shows the coding of the bits 0 and 1 for the word %MW4.0.23
which gives access to Offline mode.
0
1
Bit 1
0
1
1
0
Bit 0
0
1
Function
Normal operating mode
Activation of offline mode
Deactivation of offline mode
No change
156
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Bits and words associated with the AS-i function
Explicit exchange objects: Adjustment parameters %MW4.0.24 to %MW4.0.39
At a Glance These objects are used to manage the parameters of the AS-i slave devices.
They can be modified without stopping the AS-i function.
Description The table below shows the adjustment objects for the AS-i channel.
Address Function Meaning
%MW4.0.24 to
%MW4.0.39
Adjustment of parameters Contains respectively the value of the parameters for the slaves 1 to
31.
Least significant byte: parameters for slaves with an even address,
Most significant byte: parameters for slaves with an odd address.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
157
Bits and words associated with the AS-i function
Explicit exchange objects: Status %MW4.MOD.2:Xj
At a Glance
Description
This word type object contains information about the status of the module.
The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the word
%MW4.MOD.2:Xj .
Address
%MW4.MOD.2:X0
%MW4.MOD.2:X1
%MW4.MOD.2:X2
%MW4.MOD.2:X3
%MW4.MOD.2:X4
%MW4.MOD.2:X5
%MW4.MOD.2:X6
%MW4.MOD.2:X7
Function
Standard module status
Meaning when Xj = 1
Internal error.
Configuration error.
Line fault.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Module missing.
Not used.
158
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AS-i operating mode
13
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This Chapter introduces the different AS-i function operating modes.
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
AS-i operating mode: General
AS-i protected mode
AS-i wiring test mode
AS-i offline operating mode
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
159
AS-i operation
AS-i operating mode: General
At a Glance
Operating mode
The AS-i function allows three operating modes, each of which responds to l l particular needs. These modes are: protected mode, wiring test mode (which can be accessed using the adjustment terminal FTX 117
Adjust), l offline mode.
The diagram below shows the general function diagram of how the AS-i Bus operates.
Offline mode
Wiring test
Start of
AS-i master module
No Is the master configured?
Yes
Protected mode
Automatic control
of AS-i Bus
160
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AS-i operation
Relationship between the PLC and AS-i Bus operating modes
The table below shows the relationship between the PLC TSX 37 operating modes and those of the AS-i bus.
PLC
Configured mode (1)
AS-i Bus
Protected mode
Non configured mode (1) Wiring test mode (Configuration mode)
Key:
(1) These PLC concepts (configured, non configured) relate to the declaration of the module and the slave devices in the hardware configuration screen in the PL7 application.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
161
AS-i operation
AS-i protected mode
At a Glance The AS-i protected operating mode is the mode generally used for an application which is running.
It is assumed that the TSX SAY 100 module is configured in PL7.
This: l continually checks that the list of detected slaves is the same as the list of expected slaves.
l monitors the power supply.
In this mode, a slave will only be activated if it has been declared in the configuration and been detected.
Principle of activating a slave
The schema below show the principle of activating AS-i slaves.
PL7 AS-i Module
List of slaves expected LPS
List of slaves detected LDS
Comparison
List of slaves activated LAS
162
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AS-i operation
AS-i wiring test mode
At a Glance AS-i wiring test mode is used to access the input/output bits of slaves connected to the bus.
Note: The LDS and LAS lists, as well as the adjustment parameters, cannot be accessed.
The wiring test requires the adjustment terminal FTX 117 Adjust to be used.
Note: When accessing slave I/O objects using the FTX 117 Adjust terminal, personnel safety must be maintained while activating accessible objects, in particular slave outputs.
Access conditions
Procedure
This mode can be accessed when the PLC is in a "non-configured" state. This means when: l the PLC does not have an application, or l the AS-i module has not been configured.
The table below describes the procedure for accessing and exiting Wiring test mode from the adjustment terminal.
4
5
6
2
3
Step
1
Action
Set bit %S8 to 0
Set bit %S74 to 1
Set bit %S73 to 1
Comment
Enables wiring test mode.
Saves, if necessary, the current module configuration.
Activates the module in protected mode.
Access I/O via the %I fields for inputs and %Q fields for outputs.
Reset bit %S74 to 0 This bit should normally be set to 0.
Set bit %S8 to 1 Disables wiring test mode
Note: In this mode, all slaves must have a different address to avoid conflict when replying to the module.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
163
AS-i operation
AS-i offline operating mode
At a Glance AS-i offline mode is an advanced operating mode, which can be used for debugging or maintenance.
Note: Its use requires good knowledge of AS-i communication.
Principles
Procedure
When the module is put into offline mode, it first resets all the slaves present to zero and stops exchanges on the bus.
During offline mode, the I/O images in the module are frozen in the state in which they were at the time of the change to the mode.
When the module exits, if the list of slaves present (LPS) equals the list of slaves detected (LDS), the system restarts. If this is not the case, a fault is generated, and it then necessary to transfer to diagnostic or configuration mode.
Offline operating mode can be accessed either: l from the PL7 software application by acting on the 0 and 1 bits of the word
%MW4.0.23, l automatically on detecting an AS-i supply fault.
Reminder: Bit 7 of the word %MW4.0.3 set to 1 indicates that the AS-i Bus is in offline mode.
164
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AS-i performance
14
AS-i bus performance
At a Glance
AS-i scanning time
AS-i response time
Example
The AS-i bus is independently managed by the master. This exchanges data on each cycle with each slave device configured on the bus (in ascending order of slave address number).
t scanning time represents the exchange time between the master and n slaves (31 maximum).
Either: l l t = 156 micro seconds x (n+2), if n < 31, t = 156 micro seconds x (n+1), if n = 31.
Thus the scanning time cannot exceed 5 ms.
T response time represents the AS-i cycle time.
l l l
This includes: the bus scanning time, the update of the AS-I module internal memory, the PLC cycle.
The table below shows three examples of T response time for a PLC task lasting 10 ms, 30 ms, and 60 ms.
This T time is for a bus loaded with 31 slaves operating normally with no link faults.
PLC task
10 ms
30 ms
60 ms
Typical response time
35 ms
65 ms
110 ms
Maximum response time
56 ms
96 ms
156 ms
165
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AS-i performance
166
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Analog application
IV
At a Glance
Aim of this part
What's in this part?
This part introduces the application-specific analog function on Micro PLCs and describes its implementation using PL7 software.
This Part contains the following Chapters:
Chapter
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Chaptername
The analog application
Built-in analog interface
Analog input modules TSX AEZ 801 / TSX AEZ 802
Analog input modules TSX AEZ 414
Analog output module TSX ASZ 401
Analog output module TSX ASZ 200
TSX AMZ 600 Analog Module
Configuring the analog application
Configuration of analog channels
Debugging function
Bits and words associated with the analog application
Page
167
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Analog application
168
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
The analog application
15
Introduction to the analog application on Micro
At a Glance The application-specific analog function applies to: l l the analog interface built in to the Micro TSX 37-22 PLC the analog input/output modules inserted in a Micro PLC.
Before creating an application program, the physical operating environment in which it will be executed must be defined. In other words, the processor type and the input/ output modules used.
The use of analog inputs/outputs (built-in analog interface TSX 37-22 or analog modules), also requires the definition of the analog channel parameters used (input range, filtering level, etc.).
For this, the PL7 Micro software has the configuration editor (See Display of
Channel Parameters, p. 237) which is used to easily perform these operations.
When the application is working online this editor also has a debug function (See
Display of Channel Parameters, p. 255) which is used to adjust certain parameters
(filtering, for example) so as to best adapt them to the application.
169
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Analog application
170
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in analog interface
16
Chapter overview
This chapter introduces the analog interface built-in to the Micro TSX 37-22 PLC.
Aim of this
Chapter?
What's in this
Chapter?
This Chapter contains the following Sections:
Section
16.1
16.2
16.3
Topic
Built-in analog interface
Input processing
Output processing
Page
171
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
integrated analog
16.1
Built-in analog interface
Introducing the built-in analog interface
General
Diagram
TSX 37-22 PLCs incorporate as standard an analog interface which contains: l Eight 0-10 V input channels (convertible to 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA inputs by using shunts built in to the TSX ACZ 03 module) l One 0-10 V output channel
This interface can meet the demands of applications which require analog processing, but where the performance and characteristics of an industrial measurement device are not justified.
Graphic representation of the interface functions:
6
7
8
9
4
5
2
3
1 output
0-10 V
1 output ref. 10 V
1
Conversion
2
A/D
5
D/A
Processes
Under/Overshoots
Sensor check
Filtering
Display
3
4
Refreshing
Fault handling
6
7
Voltage reference
Bus interface BUS
172
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Functions integrated analog
The table below details the interface functions:
5
6
3
4
Numbers Functions
1 Scanning input channels using static multiplexing and value acquisition.
2 Analog/digital conversion over 8 bits (256 pulses) successive approximation of input measurements.
7
Filtering input measurements.
Refreshing the digital output value by the processor.
Digital/analog conversion of the output value over 8 bits (256 pulses).
Handling of processor dialog faults and particularly setting the output to fallback.
Providing a reference voltage for external potentiometers or those in the adjustment and adaptation module TSX ACZ 03.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
173
integrated analog
16.2
Input processing
At a Glance
Aim of this
Section?
What's in this
Section?
This section introduces the different functions of the analog inputs of the interface built in to the Micro PLC.
This Section contains the following Maps:
Topic
Timing of measurements
Under/overshoot monitoring on inputs
Sensor link monitoring
Measurement filtering
Displaying measurements
Page
174
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
integrated analog
Timing of measurements
General
Normal cycle
The timing of measurements depends on the cycle used, defined at configuration
(See
Modification of the Scanning Cycle, p. 242): normal cycle or fast cycle.
The input scanning cycle is fixed and has a value of 32 ms, independent of the number of inputs used.
Example of a scanning cycle using only channels 2, 3, 8, and 9:
Channel 2
4 ms
Channel 3 Channel 8
4 ms
Scaning cycle = 32 ms
4 ms
Channel 9
4 ms
Fast cycle Only the channels used are scanned, even if these are not consecutive. This improves the cycle time for scanning the channels.
The cycle time for scanning the channels is given by the formula:
Cycle time (ms) = 4 ms x N
N = number of channels used
For example, if 4 channels are used, the scanning cycle time will be:
4 x 4 = 16 ms
Illustration:
Channel 2
4 ms
Channel 4 Channel 6
4 ms 4 ms
Scanning cycle = 4 x 4 = 16 ms
Channel 9
4 ms
Note: In fast cycle, the user can assign the channels to FAST task (See
Modification of the Task Assigned to the Module Inputs, p. 243)
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
175
integrated analog
Under/overshoot monitoring on inputs
At a Glance
Overshoot values
For each of the analog inputs the interface carries out a range overshoot check, by checking that the measurement remains below the upper limit. If this is not the case, saturation of the measurement string is likely. An overshoot fault is signaled by a bit which can be used by the system.
Inputs allow a range overshoot of 2% of the upper limits on the full scale.
The table below gives the measurement limits for each range:
Range Lower limit Upper limit
0...10 V
0...20 mA
4..20 mA
-
-
3.2 mA
+ 10.2 V
+ 20.4 mA
+ 20.4 mA
Whole values available by default
0...10200
0...10200
- 500... + 10250
Note: The interface only detects an overshoot on the upper limit in the range 4-20 mA: 3.2 mA corresponds to - 500.
Under/overshoot identifiers
In the over/undershoot zones, there is a risk of measurement string saturation.
On under/overshoot, the acquisition of inputs continues, but they are signaled as invalid.
Limit under/overshoots are signaled by the following bits:
Bit name
%I0.i.ERR
%MW0.i.2:X1
Meaning (when = 1)
Channel i fault
Exchange type
Implicit
Range over/undershoot on channel i Explicit
Note: For inputs integrated into the module, position x of the model is equal to 0 and the i channels are between 2 and 9.
176
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
integrated analog
Sensor link monitoring
At a Glance
Fault bit
This checking is available in the range 4-20 mA. In this range the fault is detected by the interface when the intensity in the loop becomes smaller than 3.2 mA.
The sensor link fault is signaled by a status word bit for explicit exchange which can be used by the system.
Sensor link fault bit:
Bit name
%MW0.i.2:X0
Meaning (for Xj = 1)
Sensor link fault on channel i
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
177
integrated analog
Measurement filtering
At a Glance
Mathematical formula
The system uses first order filtering.
The filtering coefficient can be modified from the PL7 screen (See Modification of the
Filtering Value, p. 247) or via the program.
The mathematical formula used is as follows :
Mesf n = α × ( – 1 ) + ( 1 – α ) × Valb n with:
α = filter efficiency,
Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at moment n,
Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at moment n-1,
Valg(n)=gross value at moment n.
At configuration, the user selects the filter value from 7 possible values (0 to 6). This value can be changed, even when the application is in RUN mode.
Note: Filtering is inhibited in fast cycle mode.
Filter values The filter values are as follows:
Required efficiency
No filtering
Low filtering
Medium filtering 3
4
High filtering 5
6
0
1
2
Value to be selected
α
corresponding
0
0,750
0,875
0,937
0,969
0,984
0,992
Filter response time
Cut-off frequency
(Hz)
0
111 ms
240 ms
-
1,431
0,664
496 ms
1,01s
2.03 s
4.08 ms
0,321
0,158
0,078
0,039
178
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
integrated analog
Displaying measurements
At a Glance
Standardized display
All the measurements given to the application are in standardized display, and can be applied directly by the user.
The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimals, also with symbol °/
°°°
) from 0 to 10000 (0 °/
°°°
to 10000 °/
°°°
)
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
179
integrated analog
16.3
Output processing
Output characteristics
Writing output
Overflow monitoring
The application must provide values in a standardized format to the output: 0 to
+10000.
The values must be written in the word %QW0.10.
If the value provided by the application is less than 0 or greater than 10000, the analog output saturates to 0 V or + 10 V.
An overflow bit usable by the program is then positioned to 1.
Bit Name
%I0.10.ERR
Meaning
Channel 10 fault (analog output)
Digital / analog conversion
Refreshing the output
Fallback value
Digital / analog conversion is carried out on 8 bits:
The value provided by the application program (0 to 10000) is automatically transformed into a digital value which can be used by the converter.
Output is refreshed at the end of the MAST task or the FAST task, depending on the selection made at configuration (See Modifying the task to which the output is
The output takes the fallback value: l l l l
If dialog with the PLC is no longer possible
If the PLC switches to STOP mode
These fallback values are selected at configuration (See Modification of the Fallback
Possible options are:
Value 0
Maintained at the last value sent
180
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Analog input modules TSX AEZ
801 / TSX AEZ 802
17
Chapter overview
Aim of this
Chapter?
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter introduces the analog input modules TSX AEZ 801 and TSX AEZ 802 for the Micro PLC.
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
Introduction to the TSX AEZ 801/TSX AEZ 802 modules
Timing of measurements
Range selection and input overflow monitoring
Sensor link checking on TSX AEZ 802
What happens to the module in the event of an overload
Measurement filtering
Displaying measurements
Page
181
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AEZ 801 / 802
Introduction to the TSX AEZ 801/TSX AEZ 802 modules
General
Diagram
The TSX AEZ 801 and TSX AEZ 802 modules offer eight high level analog inputs, with common features.
For each of its inputs, the TSX AEZ 801 module offers the range 10 v or 0-10 v, depending on the selection made at configuration.
For each of its inputs, the TSX AEZ 802 module offers a range 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA, depending on the selection made at configuration (See Modification of the Input
Graphic representation of the module functions:
1000 Vrms insulation
Channel selection (0 to 7)
Conversion
Optocoupler
1
A/D
2
Optocoupler
Bus interface
BUS
DC converter
Functions
182
The table below shows the module functions:
Numbers Functions
1 Scanning input channels using static multiplexing and value acquisition
2 Digital/analog conversion (12 bits) of input measurements
The PLC processor completes the following functions:
Input under/overshoot monitoring
Measurement filtering
User-defined input measurement formatting for display in a unit which can be applied directly
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AEZ 801 / 802
Timing of measurements
General
Normal cycle
The timing of measurements depends on the cycle used, defined at configuration
(See
Modification of the Scanning Cycle, p. 242): normal cycle or fast cycle.
The input scanning cycle is fixed and has a value of 32 ms, independent of the number of inputs used.
Example of a scanning cycle using only channels 0, 1, 6, and 7:
Fast cycle
Channel 0
4 ms
Channel 1 Channel 6
4 ms
Scaning cycle = 32 ms
4 ms
Channel 7
4 ms
Only the channels used are scanned, even if they are not consecutive. This helps to improve the channel scanning cycle time.
The cycle time for scanning the channels is given by the formula:
Cycle time (ms) = 4 ms x N
N = number of channels used
For example, if 4 channels are used, the scanning cycle time will be:
4 x 4 = 16 ms
Illustration:
Channel 1 Channel 3 Channel 5 Channel 7
4 ms 4 ms 4 ms
Scanning cycle = 4 x 4 = 16 ms
4 ms
Note: In fast cycle, the user can assign the channels to FAST task (See
Modification of the Task Assigned to the Module Inputs, p. 243). In this case, it is
recommended that you do not assign too many analog input modules to the FAST task,
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
183
AEZ 801 / 802
Range selection and input overflow monitoring
Range selection Each module gives a choice (See
Modification of the Input Range, p. 244) between
two ranges for each of its inputs.
For the TSX AEZ 801 module: l l l l
+/- 10 V
0-10 V
For the TSX AEZ 802 module:
0-20 mA
4-20 mA
For each of the analog inputs the interface carries out a range overshoot check, by checking that the measurement remains below the upper limit. If this is not the case, saturation of the measurement string is likely. An overshoot fault is signaled by a bit which can be used by the system.
Generally, the modules allow a range overshoot of 5% on the full scale.
Overshoot values
Range
The table below gives the limits for the TSX AEZ 801 module:
+/- 10 V
0...10 V
Range
0...20 mA
4..20 mA
Lower limit
- 10.5 V
- 0.5 V
Upper limit
+ 10.5 V
+ 10.5 V
Whole values available by default
+/- 10500
- 500...10500
The table below gives the limits for the TSX AEZ 802 module:
Lower limit Upper limit
- 1 mA
+ 3.2 mA
+ 21 mA
+ 20.8 mA
Whole values available by default
- 500...10500
- 500...10500
Note: In the case of unipolar ranges (0…10 V, 0…20 mA), the module detects an undershoot. A fault is signaled at - 5% of the scale, which allows a quicker diagnostic at implementation and in operation.
Under/overshoot identifiers
Bit name
%Ix.i.ERR
%MWx.i.2:X1
In the over/undershoot zones, there is a risk of measurement string saturation.
On under/overshoot, the acquisition of inputs continues, but they are signaled as invalid.
Under/overshoots are signaled by the following bits (usable by the program):
Meaning (when = 1)
Fault on channel i of the module in position x
Exchange type
Implicit
Range under/overshoot on channel i of the module in position x Explicit
184
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AEZ 801 / 802
Sensor link checking on TSX AEZ 802
At a Glance
Fault bit
This checking is available in the range 4-20 mA. In this range the fault is detected by the TSX AEZ 802 module when the intensity in the loop becomes less than 3.2 mA.
The sensor link fault is signaled by a status word bit for explicit exchange which can be used by the system.
Sensor link fault bit:
Bit name
%MWx.i.2:X0
Meaning (for Xj = 1)
Sensor link fault on channel i of module x
Note: The channels of a TSX AEZ 802 module which have not been hardwired should preferably be set between 0-20 mA. If this is not the case, a "sensor link" fault will be signaled by the module.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
185
AEZ 801 / 802
What happens to the module in the event of an overload
General In the event of a surcharge – an under/overshoot on the upper (10500) or lower limit
(-10500), the module signals a range under/overshoot fault.
What happens to the module
What happens to the module in relation to the overload value:
Overload type
Overload of less than 14 VDC
(positive or negative)
Overload between 14 VDC and 30
VDC (positive or negative)
Overload greater than 30 VDC
(positive or negative)
What happens to the module Comments
The measurement string is saturated to the value of the passed limit (10500 or -10500).
The under/overshoot is not destructive for the module.
The measurement provided by the module is non-significant.
The under/overshoot is not destructive for the module.
The range overshoot is signaled while the module can.
The under/overshoot can be irreversibly destructive for the module.
186
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AEZ 801 / 802
Measurement filtering
At a Glance
Mathematical formula
The system uses first order filtering.
The filtering coefficient can be modified (See Modification of the Filtering Value,
p. 247) from the PL7 screen or via the program.
The mathematical formula used is as follows :
Mesf n = α × ( – 1 ) + ( 1 – α ) × Valb n with:
α = filter efficiency,
Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at moment n,
Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at moment n-1,
Valg(n)=gross value at moment n.
At configuration, the user selects the filter value from seven possible values (0 to 6).
This value can be changed, even when the application is in RUN mode.
Note: Filtering is inhibited in fast cycle mode.
Filter values The filter values are as follows:
Required efficiency
No filtering
Low filtering
Medium filtering 3
4
High filtering 5
6
0
1
2
Value to be selected
α
corresponding
0
0,750
0,875
0,937
0,969
0,984
0,992
Filter response time
Cut-off frequency
(Hz)
0
111 ms
240 ms
-
1,431
0,664
496 ms
1,01s
2.03 s
4.08 ms
0,321
0,158
0,078
0,039
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
187
AEZ 801 / 802
Filtering and cycle time
The module continues its acquisitions and therefore its filtering calculations regardless of the cycle time of the application task.
For example:
If the cycle of the MAST task is 120 ms (module used in normal cycle), the module will have taken into account three or four new gross values per channel, before the
MAST task reads the measurement value.
Illustration:
120 ms
Start of cycle Start of cycle
MAST task cycle
Measurement acknowledgement
Measurement acknowledgement
Available measurement
Available measurement
Available measurement
Available measurement
Available measurement
Calculation Calculation Calculation Calculation Calculation
Filtering
Module cycle
Channel n gross value
32 ms
Channel n gross value
32 ms
Channel n gross value
32 ms
Channel n gross value
32 ms
Channel n gross value
If the cycle of the MAST task is 10 ms, the module will only provide a new value every three or four cycles of the MAST task.
188
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AEZ 801 / 802
Illustration:
10 ms
Available measurement
Available measurement
Available measurement
Available measurement
Available measurement
MAST task cycle
Measurement acknowledgement
Calculation Calculation Calculation Calculation Calculation
Filtering
Module cycle
Channel n gross value
32 ms
Channel n gross value
32 ms
Channel n gross value
32 ms
Channel n gross value
32 ms
Channel n gross value
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
189
AEZ 801 / 802
Displaying measurements
At a Glance
Standardized display
User display
The measurement provided to the application can be applied directly by the user, l l who can choose (See
Modification of the Display Format, p. 245) between:
using standardized display 0-10000 (or +/- 10000 for the range +/-10 V) creating parameters for its display format by indicating the minimum and maximum values required.
The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimal places, also with symbol °/
°°°
).
Different standardized formats for each range:
Reference Display Range
Unipolar:
0-10 V
0-20 mA
4-20 mA
Bipolar:
+/- 10 V
TSX AEZ 801 from 0 to 10000 (0 °/
°°°
TSX AEZ 802 from 0 to 10000 (0 °/
°°°
TSX AEZ 802 from 0 to 10000 (0 °/
°°°
to 10000 °/
°°°
to 10000 °/
to 10000 °/
°°°
°°°
)
)
)
TSX AEZ 801 from -10000 to +10000 (-10000 °/
°°°
°°°
)
to +10000 °/
The user can select the value range in which the measurements are expressed, by selecting: l the minimum limit corresponding to the range minimum 0 °/
°°°
(or -10000 °/
°°°
) l the maximum limit corresponding to the range maximum 10000 °/
These minimum and maximum limits should be integers between -30000 and
+30000.
190
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Analog input modules TSX AEZ
414
18
Chapter overview
This chapter introduces the analog input modules TSX AEZ 414 for the Micro PLC.
Aim of this
Chapter?
What's in this
Chapter?
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
Introducing the TSX AEZ 414 module
Timing of measurements
Range selection and input overshoot monitoring
Sensor link monitoring
What happens to the module in the event of an overload
Measurement filtering
Displaying measurements
Page
191
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AEZ 414
Introducing the TSX AEZ 414 module
General
Diagram
The TSX AEZ 414 module is a multi-range acquisition device with four differential inputs.
The TSX AEZ 414 module offers the following ranges for each of its inputs according to the selection made at configuration (See
Modification of the Input Range, p. 244):
l l l
Thermocouple B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T or U
Thermowell Pt100 or Ni100 in two or four wires
High level +/- 10 V, 0-10 V, 0-5 V (0-20 mA with an external shunt). It should be noted that the external shunts are supplied with the product.
Graphic representation of the interface functions:
500 Vrms insulation
Channel selection (0 to 3)
Gain selection
Optocoupler
Input multiplexing A/D
Optocoupler
Bus interface
BUS
Internal temperature sensor
DC converter
192
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Functions
AEZ 414
The table below details the interface functions:
Input range selection for each channel.
Scanning input channels using multiplexing and value acquisition.
Digital/analog conversion (16 bits) of input measurements.
Under/overshoot checking for input values according to the declared range.
Linearization in the case of thermowells Pt100 and Ni100.
Linearization and internal or external cold junction compensation for thermocouples.
User-defined input measurement formatting for display in units which can be applied directly (physical unit or user range).
Detection of a sensor link fault in thermocouple ranges.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
193
AEZ 414
Timing of measurements
General
Measurement sequence
The cycle time of the TSX AEZ 414 module and consequently the sampling period are independent from the power frequency (50 Hz or 60 Hz).
Internal module temperature (cold junction) acquisition is added to the full acquisition of the four channels
The measurements are sequenced in the following manner:
Tcycle = 520 ms
Tchannel
Value of available channel n
New value of available channel n
Scanning time
Internal temp.
Channel
0
Channel
1
Channel
2
Channel
3
Internal temp.
Channel
0
Channel
1
Channel
2
Channel
3
The scanning cycle is always identical even if some channels or the internal temperature are not used. It is equal to 520 ms.
The table below shows the module scanning times:
Time
Acquisition time for a channel
Scanning cycle time
Abbreviation
Channel T
T cycle
Value
104 ms
520 ms
Note: Module initialization can take up to 1.5 s. During this time the channels are signaled "not ready" by bit 8 of the channel status word: %MWx.i.2:X8
194
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AEZ 414
Range selection and input overshoot monitoring
Range selection
Range under/ overshoot l l l l l l
Using the software the user can select (See
Modification of the Input Range, p. 244),
for each of the channels, one of the following ranges:
+/- 10 V
0-10 V
0-5 V (or 0-20 mA with external shunt)
1-5 V (or 4-20 mA with external shunt)
Thermowells Pt100, Ni1000
Thermocouples B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T and U
For thermocouple ranges, the module provides cold junction compensation.
However, the cold junction temperature can be measured either on the module terminal block (by a probe inside the module), or remotely by using an external Class
A Pt100 probe (not supplied) on channel 0. This parameter is selected at configuration (See
Depending on the range the under/overshoot values are as follows: l For the "bipolar voltage" range +/- 10 V, the range under/overshoot corresponds to a value outside the range +/- 105% of the full scale.
l For the "unipolar voltage" range, the range under/overshoot corresponds to a value outside the range - 5% and + 105% of the full scale.
l For temperature measurements using thermocouples, the range under/ overshoot corresponds to: l l either a standardized sensor zone under/overshoot.
or under/overshoot of the acquisition device dynamic.
l or an under/overshoot of the compensation temperature dynamic (- 5 °C to +
85 °C).
Using the internal compensation at a normative ambiance (0 °C to + 60 °C) is l compatible with the thresholds - 5 °C and 85 °C.
For temperature measurements using thermowells, the range under/overshoot corresponds to: l l
Either an under/overshoot of the acquisition device dynamic (due to a sensor or cabling anomaly).
Or a standardized sensor zone under/overshoot.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
195
AEZ 414
Under/overshoot monitoring
Whatever the chosen range, range under/overshoots are monitored. The module checks that the measurement falls between a lower and upper limit. Outside these limits, saturation of the measurement string is likely.
The table below gives the under/overshoot limits for the electrical ranges:
Range
+/- 10 V
0...10 V
0...5 V (0...20 mA)
1...5 V (4...20 mA)
Lower limit
- 10.5 V
- 0.5 V
- 0.25 V (-1 mA)
+ 0.8 V (+ 3.2 mA)
Upper limit
+ 10.5 V
+ 10.5 V
+ 5.25 V (+21 mA)
+ 5.2 V (+ 20.8 mA)
The table below gives the under/overshoot limits for the thermocouple ranges:
Range
B
E
J
K
L
N
R
S
T
U
Lower limit
°
C
- 270
°
C (- 454
°
F )
- 210
°
C (- 436
°
F )
- 270
°
C (- 454
°
F )
- 200
°
C (- 328
°
F )
- 270
°
C (- 454
°
F )
- 50
°
C (- 58
°
F )
- 50
°
- 270
- 200
C
°
°
C
C
°
F
(- 58
°
F
(- 454
(- 328
°
°
)
F
F
)
)
Upper limit
°
C
°
F
+ 812
°
C (+ 1493
°
F )
+ 1065
°
C (+ 1949
°
F )
+ 1372
°
C (+ 2502
°
F )
+ 900
°
C (+ 1652
°
F )
+ 1300
°
C (+ 2372
°
F )
+ 1769
°
C (+ 3216
°
F )
+ 1769
°
C (+ 3216
°
F )
+ 400
°
C (+ 752
°
F )
+ 600
°
C (+ 1112
°
F )
The limits are given for the following conditions:
In internal compensation the ambient temperature is 25 °C,
In external compensation, the cold junction temperature is 30 °C.
The table below gives the under/overshoot limits for the thermowell ranges:
Range
Pt100
Ni1000
Lower limit
- 200
° C (- 328
° F )
- 60
° C (- 76
° F )
Upper limit
+ 850
° C (+ 1562
° F )
+ 110
° C (+ 230
° F )
196
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AEZ 414
Note: In the event of a range under/overshoot, the given value saturates to the value of the limit passed:
Example for range 4-20 mA
Displayed value
+ 10500
+ 10500
0
- 500
Measured value
Range overflow
Tolerated overflows
Under/overshoot identifiers
The program can use range/under overshoot error bits.
Limit under/overshoots are signaled by the following bits:
Bit name
%Ix.i.ERR
%MWx.i.2:X1
Meaning (when = 1)
Fault on channel i of the module in position x
Range under/overshoot on channel i of the module in position x
Exchange type
Implicit
Explicit
Note: For thermocouple ranges, the %Ix.i.ERR bit is also set to 1 for a sensor link anomaly.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
197
AEZ 414
Sensor link monitoring
At a Glance
Fault bit
Sensor link monitoring is only done for measurements by thermocouples. However, a range under/overshoot in the range 4-20 mA (< 3.2 mA) does not cause a sensor link fault.
The sensor link fault corresponds to an open circuit on the thermocouple input.
Acknowledgement is not completely synchronous with its appearance; it can be delayed by a maximum of three "module cycles", or 1560 ms. This is the same for the disappearance of the fault.
The sensor link fault is signaled by a status word bit for explicit exchange which can be used by the system.
Sensor link fault bit:
Bit name
%MWx.i.2:X0
Meaning (for Xj = 1)
Sensor link fault on channel i of module x
198
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AEZ 414
What happens to the module in the event of an overload
General In the event of a surcharge, that is an under/overshoot on the upper or lower limit, the module signals a range under/overshoot fault.
What happens to the module
What happens to the module in relation to the overload value:
Overload type
Overload of less than 15 VDC
(positive or negative)
Overload between 15 VDC and 30
VDC (positive or negative)
Overload greater than 30 VDC
(positive or negative)
What happens to the module
The channel to channel crosstalk is not changed
The channel to channel crosstalk makes all the module inputs unusable.
Comments
The under/overshoot is not destructive for the module.
The under/overshoot is not destructive for the module.
The range overshoot is signaled while the module can.
The under/overshoot can be irreversibly destructive for the module.
Note: A sensor link fault with a 2 wire thermowell can lead to saturation of the input concerned, at a voltage between 15 VDC and 30 VDC and thus make the module inputs unusable.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
199
AEZ 414
Measurement filtering
At a Glance
Filter values
The system uses first order filtering.
The filtering coefficient can be modified (See Modification of the Filtering Value,
p. 247) from the PL7 screen or via the program.
At configuration, the user selects the filter value from seven possible values (0 to 6).
The filter values are as follows:
Required efficiency
No filtering
Low filtering
Medium filtering 3
4
High filtering 5
6
1
2
Value to be selected
0 0
α
corresponding
0,750
0,875
0,937
0,969
0,984
0,992
Filter response time
Cut-off frequency
(Hz)
0
1.81 s
3.89 s
8.06 s
16.4 s
33 s
66.3 s
Hardware filtering
0,0879
0,0409
0,0197
0,0097
0,0048
0,0024
Note: Measurement filtering is suspended when execution of the MAST task is interrupted at a breakpoint (in the debugging phase). When the breakpoint is cleared, filtering restarts without recognizing the inputs acquired during the stopped period.
200
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
AEZ 414
Displaying measurements
At a Glance
Electrical ranges:
Standardized display
Electrical ranges: User display
Temperature range
This process is used to select (See
Modification of the Display Format, p. 245) the
display format depending on which formats are provided in the user program: l l
Standardized display
User display
It is necessary to differentiate between the electrical ranges and the thermocouple or thermowell ranges.
The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimal places, also with symbol °/
°°°
).
Different standardized formats for each range:
Display Range
Unipolar:
0-10 V
0-5 V (0-20 mA)
1-5 V (4-20 mA)
Bipolar:
+/- 10 V from 0 to 10000 (0 °/
°°°
to 10000 °/
°°°
) from -10000 to +10000 (-10000 °/
°°°
°°°
)
to +10000 °/ l l
The user can select the value range in which the measurements are expressed, by selecting: the minimum limit corresponding to the range minimum 0 °/
°°°
(or -10000 °/ ) the maximum limit corresponding to the range maximum 10000 °/
°°°
+30000
The user can choose between two types of display: l Temperature display . The values are provided by default in tenths of a degree: l l tenth of a degree Celsius, if the unit chosen at configuration is ° C tenth of a degree Fahrenheit, if the unit chosen at configuration is ° F l Standardized display . The user can select standardized display 0-10000 (i.e. 0 to 10000 °/
°°°
), by specifying the minimum and maximum temperatures corresponding to 0 and 10000.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
201
AEZ 414
202
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Analog output module TSX ASZ
401
19
Chapter overview
This chapter introduces the analog output module TSX ASZ 401 for Micro PLCs.
Aim of this
Chapter?
What's in this
Chapter?
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
Introducing the TSX ASZ 401module
Writing and updating outputs
Fault handling
Page
203
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
ASZ 401
Introducing the TSX ASZ 401 module
General
Diagram
The TSX ASZ 401 module offers four analog outputs with common features and for each of them offers the range +/- 10 V, with no energy supply (no external supply) with a load of at least 2 K Ω .
Graphical representation of the interface functions:
BUS
Bus interface
1000 Vrms insulation
Transmission of 2 simultaneous channels
Optocoupler
Channel selection (0 to 1)
Conversion
D/A
D/A
Optocoupler
D/A
D/A
DC converter
Functions The table below shows the functions of the modules:
Acknowledgment of the digital values corresponding to the analog values to be obtained on exit. These values are calculated by the PLC task to which the channels are assigned.
Handling of processor dialog faults and particularly setting the output to fallback.
Digital/analog output value conversion on 11 bits + sign (-2048 to +2047). Realignment is carried out in the dynamic of the converter.
204
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
ASZ 401
Writing and updating outputs
Writing outputs
Updating outputs
The application must provide values to the outputs in a standardized format - 10000 to +10000.
The outputs of the TSX ASZ 401 module are updated two at a time at the end of the task to which they are assigned (See Modifying the task to which the output is
Example:
Suppose that channels 0 and 1 are assigned to the FAST task which has a cycle time of 2 ms and channels 2 and 3 are assigned to the MAST task which has a cycle time of 23 ms. Channel updating will be as follows:
2 ms
Task cycle FAST
Channel 0 update
Channel 1 update
Channel 2 update
Channel 3 update
Task cycle MAST
End of cycle
End of cycle
23 ms
Note: As the channels are grouped 0/1 and 2/3, it is not possible to assign channels 0 and 2 to a task (for example MAST) and 1, 3 to another task (for example FAST).
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
205
ASZ 401
Fault handling
Under/overshoot monitoring
If the values given by the application are less that -10000 or greater than +10000, the outputs saturate to - 10 V or + 10 V.
An overshoot bit which can be used by the program is then set to 1.
Bit address
%Ix.i.ERR
%MWx.i.2:X1
Meaning (for Xj = 1)
Fault on channel i of module x
Range overshoot fault
Output fallback When the PLC switches into STOP mode or dialog with the processor is no longer possible, the outputs assume the fallback value 0 or are maintained at the last value transmitted, according to the choice made at configuration (See Modification of the
Fallback Mode, p. 249) for the module.
206
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Analog output module TSX ASZ
200
20
Chapter overview
This chapter introduces the analog output module TSX ASZ 200 for Micro PLCs.
Aim of this
Chapter?
What's in this
Chapter?
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
Introducing the TSX ASZ 200 module
Writing and updating outputs
Fault handling
Fault Processing
Page
207
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
ASZ 200
Introducing the TSX ASZ 200 module
General
Diagram
The TSX ASZ 200 module offers two analog outputs with common features and offers for each the following ranges (See Modification of the Output Range (TSX
ASZ 200 and TSX AMZ 600), p. 251), with no energy supply (no external supply):
l l l
-/+10 V with a minimum load of 1 K Ω
0-20 mA with a maximum load of 600
Ω
4-20 mA with a maximum load of 600
Ω
Graphical representation of the interface functions:
1500 Vrms insulation
Transmission of 2 simultaneous channels
BUS
Bus interface
Optocoupler
Conversion
D/A
D/A
Current amplifier
Voltage amplifier
Current amplifier
Voltage amplifier
2 outputs
+/- 10 V and
0-20 mA
Functions
208
DC converter
The table below shows the functions of the modules:
Acknowledgment of the digital values corresponding to the analog values to be obtained on output. These values are calculated by the PLC task to which the channels are assigned.
Handling of processor dialog faults and particularly setting the output to fallback.
Range selection for each output: voltage or current.
Digital/analog conversion of output values: on 11 bits + sign (-2048 to +2047) in the range +/- 10 V, on 11 bits (0 to +2047) in the ranges 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA.
Realignment is carried out in the dynamic of the converter by the module.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
ASZ 200
Writing and updating outputs
Writing outputs
Updating outputs
The application must provide values in a standardized format to the outputs: l l
-10000 to +10000 in the range +/-10 V.
0 to + 10000 in the ranges 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA. The value 0 corresponding to
4 mA in the range 4-20 mA.
The two outputs of the TSX ASZ 200 module are updated at the end of the task to which they are assigned (See Modifying the task to which the output is assigned,
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
209
ASZ 200
Fault handling
Under/overshoot monitoring
The output saturation values according to the range are as follows:
Ranges Saturation value
+/- 10 V
0-20 mA
4-20 mA
Values provided by the application
Less than -10000
More than + 10000
Less than 0
More than + 10000
Less than 0
More than + 10000
- 10 V
+ 10 V
0 mA
20 mA
4 mA
20 mA
An overshoot bit which can be used by the program is then set to 1:
Bit address
%Ix.i.ERR
%MWx.i.2:X1
Meaning
Fault on channel i of module x
Range under/overshoot fault
Output fallback When the PLC switches into STOP mode, the outputs take the fallback value 0 (4mA in the range 4-20 mA) or are maintained at the last transmitted value, according to the selection made during configuration (See Modification of the Fallback Mode,
When dialog with the processor is no longer possible, the outputs take the fallback value 0 V (voltage range) or 0 mA (current range).
210
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
ASZ 200
Fault Processing
Overshoot
Monitoring
The saturation values of the outputs according to the range are the following:
Ranges Saturation value
+/- 10 V
+/- 10V
0-20 mA
4-20 mA
Values provided by the application
Less than - 10000
More than + 10000
Less than 0
More than + 10000
Less than 0
More than + 10000
Less than 0
More than + 10000
- 10 V
+ 10 V
0 V
+10 V
0 mA
20 mA
4 mA
20 mA
An overshoot bit, which can be run by the program, is then positioned at 1:
Bit address
%Ix.i.ERR
%MWx.i.2:X1
Meaning
Fault in channel i of the module x
Range overshoot fault
Output Fallback When the PLC changes to STOP, the outputs take the fallback value 0 (4 mA in the range 4-20 mA) or are kept at the last transmitted value, according to the choice made in configuration (See
Modification of the Fallback Mode, p. 249) for the
module.
When dialog with the processor is no longer possible, the outputs take the fallback value 0 V (voltage range) or 0 mA (current range).
Write Output The application must provide outputs with values in standardized format.
l l
-10000 to +10000 in the range +/- 10V,
0 to +10000 in the ranges 0-10V, 0-20mA and 4-20mA.
Refresh Outputs The two outputs of the TSX AMZ 600 module are updated at the end of the task
(********************see modification of task p255 **************) to which they are assigned.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
211
ASZ 200
212
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
TSX AMZ 600 Analog Module
21
Introduction to the Chapter
Aim of this
Chapter?
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter introduces the TSX AMZ 600 analog input/output module for Micro
PLCs.
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
Introduction to the TSX AMZ 600 Module
Measuring Speed
Selection of Ranges and Monitoring of Input Overshoots
Monitoring of Sensor Link on TSX AMZ 600
Module Behavior in Event of Overload
Filtering of Measurements
Display of Current Values
Page
213
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
TSX AMZ 600
Introduction to the TSX AMZ 600 Module
General
Synopsis
The AMZ 600 module offers 4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs of a high level.
This module does not have isolation between input and output channels. For each of its input and output channels the TSX AMZ 600 offers 2 voltage ranges (+/- 10V,
0-10V) and 2 current ranges (0-20mA, 4-20mA) according to the selection made in configuration (See
Modification of the Input Range, p. 244).
The diagram below represents the internal structure of the module:
Isolation 1000Veff
BUS
Interface
Bus
Convert
D/A
Opto
Module
Convert
D/A
Selection channel 0 to 3
Opto
Module
Convert
A/D
Voltage amplifier
Current amplifier
Voltage amplifier
Current amplifier
Multiplexer
Converter DC/DC
214
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Functions
TSX AMZ 600
The paragraph below gives the input and output functions of the module: l Input functions: l l scanning of the input channels by static multiplexing and acquisition of the values, analog/digital conversion (11 signed bits) of the input readings l l l l l monitoring input overshoot, current value filtering, user formatting the current input values for a directly operating individual display.
Output functions: accepting the digital values which correspond to the analog values to be obtained at outputs. These values are calculated by the PLC task to which the channels are assigned, l l l the processing of dialog faults with the PLC and in particular setting output fallback, selecting the range for each voltage and current output, numeric/analog conversion of the output values.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
215
TSX AMZ 600
Measuring Speed
General
Normal Cycle
The measuring speed depends on the cycle used, which is defined in configuration
(See
Modification of the Scanning Cycle, p. 242): normal cycle or fast cycle.
The input scanning cycle is fixed and has a value of 16 ms, irrespective of the number of inputs used.
Example of a scanning cycle with channels 0 and 3 used:
Channel 0
4 ms
Scanning cycle = 16 ms
Channel 3
4 ms
216
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Fast Cycle
TSX AMZ 600
Only the channels being used are scanned, even if these are not consecutive, which gives an improved channel scanning cycle time.
The channel scanning cycle time is given by the formula:
Cycle time (ms) = 4 ms x N
N = number of channels used
For example, if 2 channels are used, the scanning cycle time will be:
2 x 4 = 8 ms
Illustration:
Channel 0 Channel 1
4 ms 4 ms
Scanning cycle = 2*4 = 8 ms
Note: In fast cycle, the user is able to assign the channels in FAST task (See
Modification of the Task Assigned to the Module Inputs, p. 243). In this case, it is
recommended not to assign too many analog input modules to the FAST task.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
217
TSX AMZ 600
Selection of Ranges and Monitoring of Input Overshoots
Selection of
Ranges
Overshoot
Values
Each module offers the choice (See
Modification of the Input Range, p. 244)
between two ranges for each of its inputs.
For the TSX AMZ 600 module: l l l l
+/- 10 V
0-10 V
0-20 mA
4-20 mA
For each of the analog inputs, the interface carries out monitoring of range overrun, by checking that the current value remains less than the upper limit. If this is not the case, there is the probability of the analog measurement system being saturated. An overshoot fault is shown by a bit that can be used by the system.
In general, the modules allow a range overshoot of 5% on the full scale.
The table below gives the limits for the TSX AMZ 600 module:
Range Lower limit Upper limit
+/- 10 V
0...10 V
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
- 10.5 V
- 0.5 V
- 1 mA
+ 3.2 mA
+ 10.5 V
+ 10.5 V
+ 21 mA
+ 20.8 mA
Whole values available by default
+/- 10500
- 500...10500
- 500...10500
- 500...10500
Overshoot
Indications
Note: In the case of unipolar ranges (0-10 V, 0 − 20 mA), the module detects a negative overshoot. A fault is indicated at - 5% from the scale, which allows faster diagnostics during set-up and operation.
In the overshoot zones there is a risk of saturation of the analog measurement system.
On overshoot, the acquisition of inputs continues, but these are denoted as not valid.
Overshoot of the limits is indicated by the following bits (can be run by program):
Bit name
%Ix.i.ERR
%MWx.i.2:X1
Meaning (when = 1)
Fault in channel i of the module in position x
Range overshoot on channel i of the module in position x
Type of exchange
Implicit
Explicit
218
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
TSX AMZ 600
Monitoring of Sensor Link on TSX AMZ 600
At a Glance
Default Bit
Monitoring is offered in the range 4-20 mA. In this range a fault is detected by the
TSX AMZ 600 module when the intensity in the loop falls below 3.2 mA.
The sensor link fault is indicated by an explicit exchange status word bit, which can be run by the system.
Sensor link fault bit:
Bit name
%MWx.i.2:X0
Meaning (for Xj = 1)
Sensor link fault on channel i of the module x
Note: Non cabled channels of a TSX AMZ 600 module should preferably be parametrized in 0-20 mA. If this is not the case, a "sensor link" fault will be indicated by the module.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
219
TSX AMZ 600
Module Behavior in Event of Overload
General During an overload, i.e. an overshoot of the upper limit (10500) or lower limit (-
10500), the module indicates a range overshoot fault.
Module Behavior Behavior of module according to the overload value:
Type of overload Module Behavior
Overload less than 14 VDC (positive or negative)
The analog measurement system is saturated at the value of the limit overshoot (10500 or -10500).
Overload within 14 VDC and 30 VDC
(positive or negative)
The current value provided by the module is not significant.
Comments
Overshoot is not detrimental to the module.
The analog measurement system is saturated at the value of the limit overshoot (10500 or -500)
Overshoot is not detrimental to the module.
Overload more than 30 VDC (positive or negative)
The range overshoot fault is indicated as long as this is possible for the module.
The overshoot can be permanently detrimental to the module.
Overload of +/- 7.5 VDC
(current overload)
Overshoot is not detrimental to the module.
220
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
TSX AMZ 600
Filtering of Measurements
Introduction
Mathematical
Formula
The filtering done is a first order filtering.
The filtering coefficient can be modified (See Modification of the Filtering Value,
p. 247) from the PL7 screen or by program.
The mathematical formula used is the following:
Mesf n = α × ( – 1 ) + ( 1 – α ) × Valb n with:
α =efficiency of the filter,
Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at point n,
Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at the point n-1,
Valb(n)=gross value at point n.
During configuration, the user selects the filtering value from 7 possibilities (0 to 6).
This value can be modified, even when the application is in RUN.
Note: Filtering is inhibited in fast cycle.
Filtering Values The filtering values are the following:
Efficiency found
No filtering
Little filtering
Medium filtering 3
4
Strong filtering 5
6
0
1
2
Value to be selected
α corresponding
0
0,750
0,875
0,937
0,969
0,984
0,992
Filter response time
Outage frequency
(Hz)
0
111 ms
240 ms
-
1,431
0,664
496 ms
1.01s
2.03 s
4.08 s
0,321
0,158
0,078
0,039
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
221
TSX AMZ 600
Filtering and
Cycle Time
The module continues its acquisitions and thus its filtering calculation with no regard to the cycle time of the application task.
For example:
If the MAST task cycle is 60 ms (module used in normal cycle), the module will have accepted 3 or 4 new raw values per channel, before the MAST task comes to read the measurement value.
Illustration:
60 ms
Start of cycle Start of cycle
Cycle of the
MAST task
Accepting the current value
Accepting the current value
Available current value
Available current value
Available current value
Available current value
Available current value
Calculation Calculation Calculation Calculation Calculation
Filtering
Module cycle
Channel n gross value
16 ms
Channel n gross value
16 ms
Channel n gross value
16 ms
Channel n gross value
16 ms
Channel n gross value
222
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
TSX AMZ 600
If the MAST task cycle is 10 ms, the module will only provide a new value every 2 or
3 cycles of the MAST task.
10 ms
Cycle of the
MAST task
Accepting the current value
Available current value
Available current value
Available current value
Available current value
Calcul.
Calcul.
Calcul.
Calcul.
Filtering
Channel n gross value
16 ms
Channel n gross value
16 ms
Channel n gross value
16 ms
Channel n gross value
16 ms
Module cycle
223
TSX AMZ 600
Display of Current Values
Introduction
Standardized
Display
User Display
The current value supplied to the application can be directly run by the user who can l l choose (See
Modification of the Display Format, p. 245) between:
using the standardized display 0-10000 (or +/- 10000 for the range +/- 10V), parametrizing the display format by giving the minimum and maximum values required.
The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimals, also symbolized °/
°°°
).
Different formats standardized according to the ranges:
Display Range
Unipolar:
0-10 V
0-20 mA
4-20 mA
Bipolar:
+/- 10 V from 0 to 10000 (0 °/
°°° from 0 to 10000 (0 °/
°°° from 0 to 10000 (0 °/
°°°
to 10000 °/
°°°
to 10000 °/
°°°
to 10000 °/
°°°
)
)
) from -10000 to +10000 (-10.000 °/
°°°
°°°
)
to +10.000 °/
The user can select the range of values in which the current values are expressed, by choosing: l the lower limit corresponding to the minimum value of the range 0 °/
°°°
(or -
10000°/
°°°
) l the upper limit corresponding to the maximum value of the range10.000 °/
°°°
These lower and upper limits are integers between - 30000 and + 30000.
224
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Configuring the analog application
22
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter?
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter describes the configuration of the analog modules on the PLC Micro
This Chapter contains the following Sections:
Section
22.1
22.2
Topic
Reminder about the configuration editor
Accessing the analog application parameters
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
225
Analog configuration
22.1
Reminder about the configuration editor
At a Glance
Aim of this
Section?
What's in this
Section?
This section contains a reminder about the use of the configuration editor for the analog application.
This Section contains the following Maps:
Topic
Accessing the configuration editor
Selection of Modules
Page
226
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Analog configuration
Accessing the configuration editor
Procedure To access the configuration editor:
1 Go to the application browser:
2
3
4 l Either by clicking on the application browser icon l Or by selecting the command Tools/Browser Application
Select and click on the Station folder.
Select and click on the Configuration folder.
Double click on the Hardware configuration icon.
Illustration:
Application Browser
STATION
Configuration
Hardware configuration
Software configuration
Grafcet objects configuration
Program
Mast task
Events
Variables
Animation tables
Documentation
Runtime Screens
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
227
Analog configuration
Selection of Modules
Procedure To select a module:
1
2
Double click on the position of the rack to be configured (for example 5).
The following dialog box appears:
Add a Module
Family:
Analog
Counting
Simulation
Discrete
1.5
1.5
1.0
1.5
Module:
TSX AEZ 414
TSX AEZ 801
TSX AEZ 802
TSX AMZ 600
TSX ASZ 200
TSX ASZ 401
4 DIFF. ANA. INP. 16 BITS
8 ANA. INPUTS + -10V
8 ANA. INPUTS 0-20MA
4 ANA. INPUTS/2 ANA. OUTPUTS
2 ANALOG OUTPUTS
4 ANA. OUTPUTS + -10V
OK
Cancel
228
3
4
5
In the Family field, select the type of module (for example Analog).
In the Module field, select the reference of the module to be configured (for example TSX AEZ 801).
Confirm with OK : the module is now declared in its position (which is framed and contains the reference of the module).
Illustration:
TSX 3722 V5.0..
XMWI
XTI..
Configuration u n c o n g i t
A n a
0
TSX
3722
1 3
DMZ
28DTK
DMZ
64DTK
5
AEZ
801
2 4 6
7
8
9
10
Note: To delete a module from its position, select by clicking on it then press the <Delete> key, which brings up a dialog box. Then confirm the deletion of the module.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Limitations
Analog configuration
The limitations on the number of modules are as follows:
PLC type
TSX 37-10 + Extension
TSX 37-21/22 + Extension
TSX 37 base
Max. number of analog modules
2
4
2 modules TSX ASZ 200 and AMZ 600
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
229
Analog configuration
22.2
Accessing the analog application parameters
At a Glance
Aim of this
Section?
What's in this
Section?
This section describes the methods for accessing the analog application parameters.
This Section contains the following Maps:
Topic
Accessing Parameterization of the Integrated Analog Interface
Accessing Parameterization of an Analog Module
Page
230
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Analog configuration
Accessing Parameterization of the Integrated Analog Interface
Procedure access by double clicking on the representation of the analog interface:
Configuration
TSX 3722 V5.0...
XMWI
XTI..
C o u n n g i t
A n a
0
TSX
3722 c o m m
1
DMZ
28DTZ
2
3
4
5
AEZ
801
6
AMZ
600
7
AEZ
802
9
ASZ
401
8
ASZ
200
10
AEZ
414
Note: Only accessible if the PLC is a TSX 37-22
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
231
Analog configuration
Accessing Parameterization of an Analog Module
Procedure access by double clicking on the representation of the module to be configured (for example module TSX AMZ 600, positioned in slot 6):
Configuration
TSX 3722 V5.0...
XMWI
XTI..
i t n g
C o u n
A n a
0
TSX
3722 c o m m
1
DMZ
28DTZ
2
3
4
5
AEZ
801
6
AMZ
600
7
AEZ
802
9
ASZ
401
8
ASZ
200
10
AEZ
414
Parameterization can also be accessed via the Open module command on the Edit drop-down menu
232
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Configuration of analog channels
23
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter?
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter introduces the configuration of the analog module channels on the
Micro PLC
This Chapter contains the following Sections:
Section
23.1
23.2
23.3
Topic
Channel configuration function - General
Modifying an input channel’s parameters
Modifying an output channel’s parameters
Page
233
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Configuration of analog channels
23.1
Channel configuration function - General
At a Glance
General
What's in this
Section?
This function, which can be accessed from each module, including the interface integrated into the base module TSX 37-22, is used to display and modify the parameters for each of the module channels (electrical range, measurement filtering, measurement display, etc.)
This Section contains the following Maps:
Topic
Default Configuration of Channels
Display of Channel Parameters
Page
234
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Configuration of analog channels
Default Configuration of Channels
General If the channel parameters are not modified, these are configured with a default value.
Parameters
Module
Interface integrated
The default parameters of each of the analog modules are as follows (shown in bold in the table):
Display Filtering Number of channels
8 inputs (3)
Display format of the current value
0..10 V
0..20 mA
4..20 mA
0 to 10000 (1)
Task assignment
MAST
FAST (2)
0 ..6
1 output
TSX AEZ 801 8 inputs (3)
TSX AEZ 802 8 inputs (3)
TSX AEZ 414 4 inputs
TSX ASZ 401 4 outputs
0..10 V (1)
+/- 10 V
0..10 V
0..20 mA
4..20 mA
+/- 10 V
0..10 V
0..5 V ( 0..20 mA)
1..5 V ( 4..20 mA)
Pt100, Ni1000
Thermocouple type B, E, J, K, L, N,
R, S, T, U
+/- 10 V
0 to 10000 (1)
-10000 to +10000 (%..)
User
0 to 10000 (%..)
User
-10000 to +10000 (%..)
User
0 to 10000 (1/10
1/10
%..
°
F
° C
-10000 to +10000 (1)
)
MAST
FAST
MAST
FAST (2)
MAST
FAST (2)
MAST
FAST (2)
-
-
0 ..6
0 ..6
0 ..6
-
-
TSX ASZ 200 2 outputs +/- 10 V
0..20 mA
4..20 mA
(1) This parameter can not be modified
(2) Only in fast cycle
(3) All the channels are used
-10000 to +10000
0 to +10000 (1)
..
MAST
FAST
MAST
FAST
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
235
Configuration of analog channels
Module Number of channels
TSX AMZ 600 4 inputs
Display format of the current value
+/- 10 V
0..10V
0..20 mA
4..20 mA
2 outputs +/- 10 V
0..10V
0..20 mA
4..20 mA
(1) This parameter can not be modified
(2) Only in fast cycle
(3) All the channels are used
Display
..
..
-10000 to +10000
0 to +10000 (1)
-10000 to +10000
0 to +10000 (1)
..
..
Task assignment
MAST
FAST
Filtering
0..6
MAST
FAST
236
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Configuration of analog channels
Display of Channel Parameters
Introduction to the Screen
This screen shows the module selected and displays its configured parameters. It also gives access to the Modify Parameters function or to the Debug function.
Example of the configuration screen of the 37-22 processor:
4
1
2
3
TSX 3722 [POSITION 00.2..10]
Configuration
Designation: Processor 3722
Cycle
Normal
Fast
Fallback mode on fault
Fallback to 0
Maintain value
Channe
2
5
6
3
4
7
8
9
Used
Channe
10 MAST
Task
MAST
Task
Symbol
Symbol
Range
0..10 V
Range
0..10 V
0..10 V
0..10 V
0..10 V
0..10 V
0..10 V
0..10 V
0..10 V
Scale
%..
%..
%..
%..
%..
%..
%..
%..
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Filter
Zone 1
Zone 2
Note: If there is no mouse, pressing the <Shift><F2> keys allows you to switch between zone 3 and zone 4.
This bar shows the catalog reference and the position of the module in the PLC.
In the case of an integrated interface, the information displayed is the PLC reference
(TSX 37-22) and the channel address: 0.2 to 0.10.
This command zone shows the current function ( Configuration function) and allows you to choose the Debug function via a drop-down list box.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
237
Configuration of analog channels
Zone 3 This "module" level zone contains the short title of the module (for example: 4 analog outputs +/- 10V) and in certain cases provides additional information, such as: l For the TSX AEZ 801 / 802 input modules and for the interface integrated in the
TSX 37-22 bases, the input scanning cycle: l l
Normal (by default): the inputs are sampled every 32 ms
Fast : only the inputs declared used are sampled
TSX AEZ 801 [POSITION 05]
Configuration
Designation: 8 ANA. INPUTS+ - 10 V
Cycle:
Normal
Fast l For the TSX AEZ 414 module and if a thermocouple range is selected, the cold junction compensation executed: Internal (by default) or External .
TSX AEZ 414 [POSITION 010]
Configuration
Designation: 4 DIFF.ANA.INP.16 BITS
Cold Junction
Internal
External
238 l
In the case of external cold junction, channel 0 is forced after confirmation, in the Pt100 range.
For the output modules or for the interface integrated in the bases TSX 37-22, the output fallback mode in the case of a fault: Fallback to 0 (by default) or Maintain value .
TSX ASZ 200 [POSITION 06]
Configuration
Designation: 2 ANALOG OUTPUTS
Fallback mode on fault
Fallback to 0
Maintain value l For the analog input/output module TSX AMZ 600 the screens are different between the inputs and outputs.
l Inputs:
Normal (by default): the inputs are sampled every 16 ms
Fast : only the inputs declared used are sampled
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Configuration of analog channels
The "channel hardware configuration" gives the slot of the riders to be placed by the user depending on the selected range.
Change of configuration between "inputs" and "outputs" is easy to access via the drop-down menu.
TSX AMZ 600 [POSITION 06]
Configuration
Designation: 4 ANA. INPUTS/2 ANA. OUTPUTS
Cycle:
Normal
Fast
Inputs
Hardware configuration of channels
Expected position of the riders on the module
3 2 1 0 l Outputs: the additional information is: the output fallback mode in the case of a fault: Fallback to 0 (by default) or Maintain value .
Change of configuration between "inputs" and "outputs" is easy to access via the drop-down menu.
TSX AMZ 600 [POSITION 06]
Configuration
Designation: 4 ANA. INPUTS/2 ANA. OUTPUTS
Fallback mode on fault:
Fallback to 0
Maintain value
Outputs
239
Configuration of analog channels
Zone 4 This "channel" level zone shows the parameters configured for each of the used channels of the module. For the unused channels, only the channel number and the l l symbol are displayed.
Details of the different columns:
Channel : number of the input or output channel.
Used : reduces the module cycle time when the fast scanning cycle is selected
(only the used channels are scanned).
l Task : l For the input modules, shows the task into which the inputs are assigned: task
MAST or task FAST (only in fast scanning cycle). When this is possible (in fast scanning cycle), a drop-down list box allows the task to be modified.
l
Note : The TSX AEZ 414 module inputs are always assigned to the MAST task.
For the output modules, shows the task at the end of which the outputs will be updated: MAST or FAST . A drop-down list box allows this task to be modified.
l l l l
Symbol : symbol defined by the user and associated with the language object of the channel. If the channel has no associated symbol, this field is empty.
Range : current input or output channel range. According to the type of module, l l this may be:
Electric (+/- 10 V, 0..10 V, 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA)
Thermocouple (of type B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T and U) l Thermostatic probe (Pt100 or Ni1000)
Scale : display format of the current value This may be: l Normalized 0..10000 or +/- 10000 (%..) l User
Filter : value of the filter on the current value: l l l l
0 : no filtering
1 and 2: little filtering
3 and 4: medium filtering
5 and 6: strong filtering
240
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
23.2
Configuration of analog channels
Modifying an input channel’s parameters
At a Glance
Aim of this
Section?
What's in this
Section?
This section contains the different procedures for modifying the parameters of an analog module input channel.
This Section contains the following Maps:
Topic
Modification of the Scanning Cycle
Modification of the Task Assigned to the Module Inputs
Modification of the Input Range
Modification of the Display Format
Modification of the Filtering Value
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
241
Configuration of analog channels
Modification of the Scanning Cycle
General
Procedure
The scanning cycle can be modified on a TSX AEZ 801 / 802, AMZ 600 module or on the interface integrated in the TSX 37-22 bases.
These parameters ( Normal / Fast and Used ) can not be modified in online mode, if the application has been transferred into the PLC with their default values (normal cycle and all channels used).
For the TSX AMZ 600, the screen is slightly different but the principle is the same.
To modify the scanning cycle, proceed as follows:
1
2
Access the configuration editor.
Select the type of cycle required using the two command buttons: l l
Normal
Fast
Example of a screen for a TSX AEZ 801 (equivalent to the AMZ 600):
TSX AEZ 801 [POSITION 05]
Configuration
Designation: 8 ANA. INPUTS + - 10V
Cycle:
Normal
Fast
Channel
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Used
MAST
Task Symbol Range
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V not used not used
Scale
%..
%..
%..
%..
%..
%..
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Filter
3 If the fast cycle is selected, in the Used column check only the used channels.
242
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Configuration of analog channels
Modification of the Task Assigned to the Module Inputs
General
Procedure
This function can only be modified on the TSX AEZ 801 / 802, AMZ 600 modules or on the interface integrated in the TSX 37-22 bases.
For the TSX AMZ 600, the screen is slightly different but the principle is the same.
To modify the task assigned to the inputs, proceed as follows:
1
2
Access the configuration editor.
In the drop-down list box click on the Task column:
Example of a screen for a AEZ 801 (equivalent to the AMZ 600):
TSX AEZ 801 [POSITION 05]
Configuration
Designation: 8 ANA. INPUTS + - 10V
Cycle:
Normal
Fast
Channel
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Used
MAST
Task
MAST
FAST
Symbol Range
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
Scale
%..
%..
%..
%..
%..
%..
%..
%..
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Filter
3 Select MAST or FAST in the list.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
243
Configuration of analog channels
Modification of the Input Range
Procedure To modify the input range, proceed as follows:
1
2
Access the configuration editor.
In the drop-down list box click on the Range column:
Illustration:
Channel
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Used
MAST
Task Symbol Range
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
Scale
%..
%..
%..
%..
%..
%..
%..
%..
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Filter
3 Select the range required in the list.
244
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Configuration of analog channels
Modification of the Display Format
Electric Ranges To modify the display format, proceed as follows:
1
2
3
Access the configuration editor.
Double click in the cell of the channel to be modified in the Scale column or press<Enter> with the cursor positioned on the same cell:
The Channel parameters dialog box appears.
Illustration:
Channel
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Used
MAST
Task Symbol Range
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
%..
%..
%..
%..
Scale
User
%..
%..
%..
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Filter
Scale
-100% ->
View
-100
100% -> 100
4 If the default values are selected, the channel parameters display zone shows %..
.
In the opposite case (user display), it shows User .
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
245
Configuration of analog channels
Thermal Ranges
(TSX AEZ 414)
To modify the display format, proceed as follows:
1
2
3
Access the configuration editor.
Double click in the cell of the channel to be modified in the Scale column or press
<Enter> with the cursor positioned on the same cell:
The Channel parameters dialog box appears.
Illustration:
Channel
0
1
2
3
Task
MAST
Symbol Range
Pt100
Pt100
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
Scale
%..
1/10 °C
%..
%..
0
0
0
0
Filter
Chan. 0 Parameters
Temperature range from Unit
-2000 to 8500 1/10 °C
° C
° F
Scale
Standardized
View
-2000 1/10 °C -> 0
8500 1/10 °C -> 10 000
4
5
6
7
8
Select the unit in which the readings are to be displayed (Degrees Celsius or
Fahrenheit) using the two command buttons in the Unit zone.
Then select the display mode in the Scale zone: l l
In temperature:
Standardized:
Standardized
Standardized
box not checked
box checked
If the standardized display is selected, if necessary, modify one or both display limits.
In this case, the display becomes user standardized.
Close the Channel parameters dialog box to confirm the selections.
l l
If temperature display is selected, the channel parameters display zone shows
10°C or 1/10°F
1/
If the standardized display (default or user) is selected, the channel parameters display zone shows %..
246
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Configuration of analog channels
Modification of the Filtering Value
Procedure To modify the filtering value, proceed as follows:
1
2
Access the configuration editor.
In the drop-down list box click on the Filter column.
Illustration:
3
4
5
6
Channel
0
1
2
7
Used
MAST
Task Symbol Range
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
Scale
User
%..
%..
%..
%..
%..
%..
%..
0
0
0
0
0
2
Filter
3
4
Select the filtering value required in the list.
The alpha coefficient value of the selected filter and the associated response time are then displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the screen.
Reminder : In fast scanning cycle, filtering is inhibited on the TSX AEZ 801 /
802, AMZ 600 modules or on the interface integrated in the TSX 37-22 bases.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
247
Configuration of analog channels
23.3
Modifying an output channel’s parameters
At a Glance
Aim of this
Section?
What's in this
Section?
This section contains the different procedures for modifying the parameters of an analog module output channel.
This Section contains the following Maps:
Topic
Modification of the Fallback Mode
Modifying the task to which the output is assigned
Modification of the Output Range (TSX ASZ 200 and TSX AMZ 600)
Page
248
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Configuration of analog channels
Modification of the Fallback Mode
Procedure To modify the fallback mode, proceed as follows:
1
2
Access the configuration editor.
Select the fallback mode using the two command buttons.
Example of a screen for a TSX ASZ 401 (equivalent to the AMZ 600):
TSX ASZ 401 [POSITION 06]
Configuration
Designation: 4 ANA.OUTPUTS +/-10V
Fallback mode on fault
Fallback to 0
Maintain value
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
249
Configuration of analog channels
Modifying the task to which the output is assigned
Procedure To modify the task, proceed as follows:
1
2
Access the configuration editor.
Choose the task from the pull-down box list.
Illustration:
Channel
0 MAST
Task
1 MAST
FAST
Symbol Range
4..20mA
4..20mA
250
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Configuration of analog channels
Modification of the Output Range (TSX ASZ 200 and TSX AMZ 600)
Procedure To modify the output range, proceed as follows:
1
2
Access the configuration editor.
Select the required range in the list in the drop-down list box:
Example of a screen for a TSX ASZ 200 (equivalent to the AMZ 600):
Channel
0
1
MAST
Task Symbol Range
4..20mA
+/- 10V
0..20mA
4..20mA
3
For the TSX AMZ 600 module there is another range: 0..10V.
The new selection appears in the channel parameters display zone.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
251
Configuration of analog channels
252
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Debugging function
24
At a Glance
Aim of this
Chapter?
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter describes the Debugging function of the analog modules on the PLC
Micro.
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
Introduction to the Debugging function
Display of Channel Parameters
Module Diagnostics Display
Deletion of Module Channel Forcing
Display of Detailed Channel Diagnostics
Modification of the Filtering Value
Channel Forcing / Delete Forcing
Page
253
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Analog debugging
Introduction to the Debugging function
General This debugging function can be accessed for each module from the channel parameters (See
Display of Channel Parameters, p. 237) display screen. This is
only possible if the PLC is in on-line.
The debug screen is displayed: l Either from the pull-down dialog box which is used to alternate access to the parameter Debugging and Configuration functions.
TSX 3722 [POSITION 00.2..10]
Configuration
Désignation : Processeur 3722
Debug
Cycle
Normal
Fast
Fallback mode on failure
Fallback to 0
Maintain value l Or from the View menu in the PL7 Micro software and the Debugging option.
The Debugging function is used to display in on-line mode, the parameters for each of the analog module channels, including the interface built-in to the PLC TSX 37-22.
This function is also used to access diagnostics for the module and selected channel when a fault is present.
254
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Analog debugging
Display of Channel Parameters
Introduction to the Screen
This screen shows the module selected and displays in real time the value and state of each of its channels. It also gives access to the adjustment of certain channel parameters (forcing of the input or output value, adjustment of the filtering value, etc.).
Example of screen for a TSX AEZ 801:
1 TSX AEZ 801 [POSITION 05]
2
Designation: 8 ANA. INPUTS+ - 10 V
DIAG ...
3
Global unforcing
4
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
Channel
0
Symbol
F
F ERR
DIAG...
DIAG...
DIAG...
DIAG...
DIAG...
DIAG...
DIAG...
DIAG...
-42
84
-58
-84
-26
-11
0
-53
Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Filter
1
2
Example of screen for a TSX AMZ 600:
3
TSX AMZ 600 [POSITION 06]
Debugging
Designation: 4 ANA. INPUTS/2 ANA. OUTPUTS
Global unforcing
DIAG ...
4
Channel
2
3
0
1
Symbol
F
F
F
F
F
5
Inputs
ERR
DIAG...
DIAG...
DIAG...
DIAG...
500
Value
15
35
80
0
0
2
0
Filter Range
+/-10V
0..10V
0..20mA
4..20mA
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
255
Analog debugging
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Zone 5
This bar shows the catalog reference and the position of the module in the PLC.
In the case of an integrated interface, the information displayed is the PLC reference
(TSX 37-22) and the channel address: 0.2 to 0.10.
This command zone shows the current function ( Debug function) and allows you to choose the Configuration function via a drop-down list box.
This "module" level zone contains the short title of the module (for example: 8 analog inputs +/- 10 V). It also offers two command buttons which allow respectively: l Access to the module diagnostics when the module has a fault: this is shown by l the light that is integrated in the diagnostics access button, which turns red.
To globally delete all channel forcing.
This "channel" level zone displays in real time the value and status of each of the module's channels.
l l l l l
Details of the different columns:
Channel : number of the input or output channel.
Symbol : symbol defined by the user and associated with the language object of the channel. If the channel has no associated symbol, this field is empty.
l F : forcing status of the channel: F if the channel is forced or no indication when the channel is not forced.
ERR : channel status: the ERR indication indicates that there is a channel fault.
Value
Filter
: channel value.
: value of the filter on the current value: l l 0 : no filtering l l
1 and 2: little filtering
3 and 4: medium filtering l 5 and 6: strong filtering
Range : range value (only on TSX AMZ 600).
This command zone, only on the TSX AMZ 600 , allows you to choose between inputs and outputs.
256
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Analog debugging
Module Diagnostics Display
At a Glance When there is a module fault, a certain number of LEDs, which can be accessed in the configuration editor screens, turn red.
l Module position LED at the level of the screen representing it (first configuration editor screen).
l LED integrated in the DIAG command in the "module" level zone.
In addition, pressing the DIAG command button accesses the Module Diagnostics screen which displays the current module faults, classed according to category: internal faults, external faults or other faults.
Illustration for a ASZ 200 (identical for other modules):
Configuration
TSX 3722 V1.5...
XMWI
XTI..
m p c o g e t a
A n a
0 1 3 5 7
TSX
3722
DMZ DMZ
28AR
Chan
0
1
Symbol
AEZ
801
ASZ
200
DIAG ...
4
Global unforcing
F
6 8
ERR
DIAG.
0
Value
DIAG.
0
9
10
Other faults
Faulty channel(s)
OK
Fault display
indicators red
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
257
Analog debugging
List of Module
Faults l l l l
List of module faults that can appear during diagnostics:
Module failure
Faulty channel(s)
Configuration fault
Module missing or switched off
Note: In the event of a configuration fault or missing module, access to the module diagnostics screen is not possible. In this case the following message appears on the screen: "The module is missing or different from the one configured to this position".
258
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Analog debugging
Deletion of Module Channel Forcing
Procedure To delete forcing of the channels of a module, proceed as follows:
1
2
Access the Module debug screen.
Click on the Global unforcing button:
Example of a screen for a TSX AEZ 801 (equivalent to the AMZ 600):
TSX AEZ 801 [POSITION 05]
Designation: 8 ANA. INPUTS+ - 10 V
Global unforcing
DIAG ...
3 The forcing of all forced channels is deleted.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
259
Analog debugging
Display of Detailed Channel Diagnostics
At a Glance When a channel has a fault, the DIAG command button associated with this channel in the ERR column turns red.
Pressing the DIAG command button then accesses a Channel Diagnostics screen
(identical to the one for Module Diagnostics) which shows the channel faults, classified according to category: internal faults, external faults or other faults.
Illustration:
TSX ASZ 200 [POSITION 06]
Designation: 2 ANALOG OUTPUTS
Chan
0
1
Symbol
DIAG ...
Global unforcing
F ERR
DIAG.
DIAG.
0
0
Value
Channel Diagnostics
Internal faults External faults
24 V power supply fault
Other faults
Forced channel
OK
List of Channel
Faults l l l l l l
List of channel faults that can appear during diagnostics:
Sensor link fault
Range overshoot fault
Configuration fault
Application fault
Forced channel
Supply fault 24V (for TSX AEZ 414 and TSX AMZ 600 outputs).
260
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Analog debugging
Modification of the Filtering Value
Procedure To modify the filtering value, proceed as follows:
1
2
3
Access the Module debugging screen.
Double click on the line of the channel to be modified to bring up the Channel
Adjust window.
Select a filter value from the list in the Filtering drop-down list dialog box.
Illustration:
4
5
2
3
6
7
Channel
0
1
Symbol F ERR Value Filter
-26
-11
0
0
-16
-47
-37
84
-63
-84
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust Channel 2
Filtering
DIAG...
3
0
1
2
-100000 to 10000
Forcing
0
Force
Unforce
4 Confirm by closing.
Note:
Whatever the scanning cycle (normal or fast), modification of filtering is not possible on an unused channel (TSX AEZ 801 / 802, AMZ 600 and interface integrated in bases TSX 37-22).
For the used channels, modification of filtering is also impossible in fast cycle.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
261
Analog debugging
Channel Forcing / Delete Forcing
Procedure To force or delete forcing of a channel, proceed as follows:
1
2
Access the Module debugging screen.
Double click on the line of the channel to be modified to bring up the Channel
Adjust window.
262
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
3
Analog debugging
Enter a value in the Forcing entry field.
Illustration for a TSX AEZ 801:
TSX AEZ 801 [POSITION 05]
Designation: 8 ANA. INPUTS+ - 10 V
Channel
4
5
6
7
2
3
0
1
Symbol
DIAG ...
Global unforcing
F
F
F
ERR
DIAG..
DIAG..
DIAG..
DIAG..
DIAG..
DIAG..
DIAG..
DIAG..
Value
-25
2000
1000
-47
-42
84
-58
-79
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
3
Filter
Display
Range +/-10V
-100000 to 10000
Forcing
2000 Force
Unforce
Illustration for a TSX AMZ 600:
TSX AMZ 600 [POSITION
Debugging
Designation: 4 ANA. INPUTS/2 ANA. OUTPUTS
DIAG ...
Global unforcing
2
3
0
1
Channel Symbol
F
F
F
F
F
Inputs
ERR
DIAG...
DIAG...
DIAG...
DIAG...
500
15
35
80
Value Filter
0
0
2
0
Adjust Channel 1
Display
Range 0..10V
0 to 10000
Range
+/-10V
0..10V
0..20mA
4..20mA
Forcing
15 Force
Unforce
Filtering
0 Confirm
263
Analog debugging
4
5
6
Press the Force command button to force the selected channel.
The information F appears in the cell in the F column that corresponds to the forced channel.
To delete forcing, select the channel and press the Unforce command button.
Forcing an Input When an analog input is forced, the value present at the input is not available . The forced value is shown in the screen's Values and Forcing fields.
Forcing of inputs is active whether the PLC is in RUN or STOP.
Whatever the scanning cycle (normal or fast), forcing of inputs is not possible on an unused channel (TSX AEZ 801 / 802, TSX AMZ 600 and interface integrated in bases TSX 37-22).
Forcing an
Output
When an analog output is forced, the value present at the module output is shown in the screen's Forcing field. The value calculated by the application remains displayed in the screen's Value field.
Forcing of outputs is only valid if the PLC is in RUN.
264
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Bits and words associated with the analog application
25
At a Glance
Subject of this chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter introduces the bits and words associated with the analog application on PLC Micro.
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
Implicit exchange objects associated with the analog application
Explicit Exchange Objects Associated with Inputs/Outputs
Configuration objects associated with the analog application
Page
265
TLX DS 37 PL7 xx
analog bits and words
Implicit exchange objects associated with the analog application
At a Glance These are objects used for programming and diagnostics of analog modules.
These objects are exchanged automatically on each task cycle in which the channels of the module or the built-in interface are configured.
Channel values The following table gives the words containing the analog channel values:
Address
%IWx.i
%QWx.i
Function
Value of input channel i of the analog input module in position x.
(For inputs integrated into the TSX 37-22 basic module, x = 0 and i is between 2 and 9).
Value of output channel i of the analog output module in position x.
(For the output integrated into the TSX 37-22 base module, x =
0 and i = 10).
Example: the word %IW5.3 contains the value present in input 3 of the module in position 5.
Error bit objects The following table gives the error bits:
Address
%Ix.i.ERR
%Ix.MOD.ERR
Meaning
When set to 1, indicates that the input channel i of the module in position x is faulty.
When set to 1, indicates that the module in position x is faulty.
266
TLX DS 37 PL7 xx
analog bits and words
Explicit Exchange Objects Associated with Inputs/Outputs
General
Internal Words
These objects are exchanged via instructions. They are only useful for advanced programming of the application-specific function.
Table of words available according to the different types of module:
Address
%MWx.MOD.2
%MWx.i
%MWx.i.1
%MWx.i.2
%MWx.i.7
Meaning Built-in analog
Module status word Yes
Exchange in progress Yes
Exchange report
Channel status word
Adjustment (Filtering coefficient)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Input modules
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Output modules
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Details of the explicit exchange words
Analog module x status word:
Address
%MWx.MOD.2:X0
%MWx.MOD.2:X1
%MWx.MOD.2:X2
%MWx.MOD.2:X3
%MWx.MOD.2:X4
%MWx.MOD.2:X5
%MWx.MOD.2:X6
%MWx.MOD.2:X7 to 15
Meaning (when = 1)
Module failure
Faulty channel(s)
Reserved
Self-testing in progress
Reserved
Configuration fault
Module missing or switched off
Reserved
Channel i status word
Address
%MWx.i.2:X0
%MWx.i.2:X1
%MWx.i.2:X2
%MWx.i.2:X3
%MWx.i.2:X4
%MWx.i.2:X5
Meaning (when = 1)
Sensor link fault
Range overshoot fault
Reserved
24 V power supply fault (output modules and output channels of mixed analog modules)
Module failure
Configuration fault
TLX DS 37 PL7 xx
267
analog bits and words
Address
%MWx.i.2:X6
%MWx.i.2:X7
%MWx.i.2:X8
%MWx.i.2:X9 to 12
%MWx.i.2:X13
%MWx.i.2:X14 and 15
Meaning (when = 1)
Communication fault
Adjustment parameter value outside limits
Channels not ready (module initialization in progress)
Reserved
Forced channel
Reserved
268
TLX DS 37 PL7 xx
analog bits and words
Configuration objects associated with the analog application
At a Glance
Constant words
These are the objects which can only be accessed in read format and which contain the configuration parameters.
Table of constant words available according to the different types of module:
Address
%KWx.i.0
%KWx.i.1
%KWx.i.2
Meaning Analog builtin
Yes Channel parameters defined at configuration
Minimal scale values defined at configuration
No
Maximum scale values defined at configuration
No
Input modules
Yes
Yes
Yes
Output modules
Yes
No
No
Details of word
%KW.x.i.0
Command word for the input channels:
Address
%KWx.0:X0 to X5
Meaning
Range of use coded on 6 bits:
00 0000 = reserved
00 0001 = 4-20 mA or Thermocouple B
00 0010 = 0-20 mA or Thermocouple E
00 0011 = Thermocouple J
00 0100 = Thermocouple K
00 0101 = Thermocouple N
00 0110 = Thermocouple R
00 0111 = 1-5 V or Thermocouple S
00 1000 = Thermocouple T
00 1001 = 5 V or Thermocouple U
00 1010 = 10 V or Thermocouple L
00 1011 to 01 1111 = reserved
10 0000 = Pt100
10 0010 = reserved
10 0010 = Ni1000
10 0011 to 11 1101 = reserved
11 1110 = discrete range
11 1111 = reserved
TLX DS 37 PL7 xx
269
analog bits and words
Address
%KWx.0:X6
%KWx.0:X7
%KWx.0:X8
%KWx.0:X9
%KWx.0:X10
%KWx.0:X11
%KWx.0:X12
%KWx.0:X13
%KWx.0:X14 and X15
Meaning
Polarity: l if electrical range:
0 = unipolar, 1 = bipolar l if temperature range:
0 = °C, 1 = °F
Type of range:
0 = electrical, 1 = temperature
Scanning cycle
0 = normal, 1 = fast
Channel used
0 = normal, 1 = fast not used
Not used
Cold junction compensation:
0 = internal, 1 = external
(only on TSX AEZ 414)
Scale:
0 = manufacturer, 1 = user
Not used
Command word for the output channels:
Address
%KWx.0:X0 to X5
%KWx.0:X6
%KWx.0:X7
%KWx.0:X8
%KWx.0:X9 and X10
%KWx.0:X11
%KWx.0:X12 to X15
Meaning
Output range coded on 6 bits:
00 0000 = reserved
00 0001 = 4-20 mA
00 0010 = 0-20 mA
00 0011 to 00 1001 = reserved
00 1010 = 10 V
00 1011 to 11 1111 = reserved
Polarity:
0 = unipolar, 1 = bipolar
Reserved
Fallback mode
0 = fallback, 1 = maintain
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
270
TLX DS 37 PL7 xx
Operator Dialog functions
V
Introduction
Aim of this part
What's in this part?
This part introduces the specific built-in Operator Dialog functions of PL7 and describes the software setup.
This Part contains the following Chapters:
Chapter
26
27
28
Chaptername
General presentation of the Operator Dialog functions
Built-in DOP functions
Appendices
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
271
Operator Dialog functions
272
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
General presentation of the
Operator Dialog functions
26
General presentation
Introduction The PL7 software allows the implementation of specific functions, designed to simplify the use of an operator dialog terminal (version 2.0 and higher) on a Micro
PLC.
These functions are the basic elements of the PL7 language.
They allow the following actions to be carried out without referring to the l l l communication media between the command console CCX 17 and the PLC: displaying messages, displaying message and alarm message groups, entering values from the PLC program.
Hence the Operator Dialog functions are completely integrated in the PLC l l l l l application and support: data cohesion, unique saving, easy maintenance, simplified consoles.
...
The processing of these functions occurs asynchronously to the processing of the operative task that enabled their activation.
How to access a
DOP function
See
Accessing a specific function, method or procedure type instruction, p. 53.
273
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
General presentation
Conditions for using built-in
DOP functions
Example of a
DOP function
The built-in DOP functions require a program space of 1 Kword (4.7 Kwords for
ADJUST). Variables must be reserved for the data you want to display (use the constants %KWi).
The illustration below shows an example of a DOP function written in the different
PL7 languages using the assisted entry of the library functions.
PANEL-CMD
Parameters
Console address:
Data to Send:
%MW0
%KW40
Commands
Clear
Screen
Entry log
Alarm log
Alarm management
Cancel an Alarm
6
2
Line
Clear
Clear
Report:
Line number
Alarm number
%MW100 4
1
1
OK Cancel
LD Language
%M100 %MW100>> OPERATE
PANEL_CMD (ADR#0.0.4, %KW0:2, %MW>>
IL Language
LDN
ANDN
%100
%MW100:X0
[PANEL_CMD (ADR#0.0.4, %KW0:2, %MW0: 4 ) ]
ST Language
IF NOT %M100 AND NOT %MW100. X0 THEN PANEL_CND (%MW0 . 6,%KV0 . 2,%MW100 . 4),
END_-F
274
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
27
Introduction
Aim of this chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter describes the different built-in DOP functions and shows how they are set-up in PL7.
This Chapter contains the following Sections:
Section
27.1
27.2
Topic
Description of the parameters common to the different DOP functions
Description of the built-in DOP functions
Page
275
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
27.1
Description of the parameters common to the different DOP functions
Introduction
Aim of this section
This section shows the main parameters, divided into zones, of the built-in DOP functions.
Note: The parameters specific to a DOP function are shown at the level of the function concerned.
What's in this
Section?
This Section contains the following Maps:
Topic
General
Parameters Zone: Terminal address
Parameters field: Data to be sent
Parameter field: Data to be received:
Parameters field: Report
Message field
Field zone
Page
276
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
General
Introduction
Illustration
The Built-in DOP functions are part of the procedure category; they do not return value, but they do possess several parameters, some of which have to be filled in.
The functions use three types of parameters: l l l in read only (IN) format, acknowledged at the start of function execution, in write only (OUT) format, set at close of function execution, in read and write format (IN/OUT), whose contents have been acknowledged at the start of function execution and are then updated by the function results.
The parameter type is displayed in the Type of Parameter of the … column located in the Library functions screen.
The illustration below gives an insight into the Library functions screen where the various parameters of the selected function are displayed.
PL7: Library functions
EF
Function information: Parameters Detail...
Family Lib.V.
App.V
Dates, Times, and Periods2.10
-
Diagnostics
Integrated DOP
Explicit exchanges
1.01
-
3.03 3.03
1.00
Call format
Name
ADJUST
ASK_MSG
ASK_VALUE
ASSIGN_K
PROCEDURE parameter:
Name Type
ADR AR_W
DATA AR_W
VAL AR_W
Kind
IN
IN
Comment
CCX17 address table
Table for data to be sent
OUT Table for data to be received
Comment
Read/write memory objects and I/O
Variable blocking entry on CCX
Variable blocking entry on >>
Dynamic key assignment >>
Entry field
?
Call display
ASK_MSG( )
OK Cancel
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
277
Built-in DOP functions
Parameters Zone: Terminal address
At a Glance
Addressing in words or constants
This parameter contains the access path (addressing) of the CCX 17 interface terminal.
This path can be either: l l located in a table of six internal words (%MW), located in a table of six internal constants (%MW), l entered directly as an immediate value in the form of an ADR# operator.
ADR# is thus assimilated into a table of six internal consecutive words.
The table below gives the meaning of the different words composing the terminal address.
Word number
%MWi / %KWi
%MWi +1 / %KWi+1
%MWi +2 / %KWi+2
%MWi +3 / %KWi+3
%MWi +4 / %KWi+4
%MWi +5 / %KWi+5
Description
Most significant
6 (Uni-telway)
254 (1)
0
0
Module number
CCX 17 address
SYS
0
0
Least significant
0
0 (1)
0 channel
Key
(1) CCX 17 terminal operation only authorizes one intra-station address. Consequently, the {Network.Station} pair systematically takes the value {0.254}.
Writing to this field is optional.
Uni-telway
Addressing
Note: The keyword SYS (value 254) corresponds to addressing the system channel (UNI-TE server) as a communication channel.
Addressing for a CCX 17 connected to the Uni-telway bus takes the following form:
ADR#{<Network>.<Station>}<module>.<channel>.<CCX 17 address> ,
ADR#{<Network>.<Station>}<module>.<channel>.SYS
,
ADR#<module>.<channel>.<CCX 17 address> ,
ADR#<module>.<channel>.SYS.
278
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
Addressing examples
If you are using: in the function entry Help screen, … internal words (or constants)
Example:
Parameters
Terminal address: %MW0 6
ADR syntax
A CCX 17 slave at address UTW 4-5 connected to a master Micro PLC via the
Uni-telway integrated link (channel 0).
An address can be entered in several ways (example using the internal words
%MW0 to %MW5):
Example: you must enter the program …
%MW0:=16#0600;
%MW1:=16#FE00;
%MW2:=16#0000;
%MW3:=16#0400;
%MW4:=16#0000;
%MW5:=16#0000; or
%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;
-
Parameters
Terminal address: ADR#0.0.4
FONCTION_DOP(ADR#0.0.4,...
Note: When using constants, you must first initialize the %KW0:6 table in the Data editor, by successively assigning the %KWis of which it is composed.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
279
Built-in DOP functions
Parameters field: Data to be sent
Introduction
Locating items within the PLC application
Data to be sent is individual to each type of MMI function.
The data can be found either in the PLC application, or in the CCX 17 when it has its own application.
In the case where data is to be found in the PLC application, it can be sent from: l l a table of internal words (%MW), a table of internal constants (%KW).
The table below shows the structure of data sent in this way.
Role Word number
1
2
3
4, 5, ...
Contains a contains a marker for value 16#CC17, and has a double role: l it allows the Help screen to identify a correct message and to redisplay the values on the entry screen in order to help modify or display default values.
l it allows the function being carried out to check that the table received does actually contain a message for a CCX 17. In fact, it is possible to call an
Integrated DOP function in a program without going via the Help/Control screens.
In the case of an unmarked message, the function can immediately return an error back to the application without sending unreliable data to the console.
Contains the command number.
Contains the length of data to be sent.
Contains the data to be sent.
Note: For reasons of efficiency, the <Data to be sent> parameter can be programmed using %KWi constants. In this way the software automatically initializes this data field with adequate values.
Selecting %MW bars access to different fields in the entry help box for integrated
DOP functions. It is then necessary to establish, either manually or by program, the contents of the data to be sent (see PL7 MMI 17 software documentation).
280
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Location in a
CCX 17 with application
Built-in DOP functions
When data is in a CCX 17, the data to be sent is limited to DOP function execution commands.
This data can be sent from the PLC application: l l from a table of internal words (%MW), from a table of internal constants (%KW), l directly using an immediate integer value.
The table above shows data structure when using a table.
Role
1
2
Word number
Contains a command number
Contains the data to be sent to the console.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
281
Built-in DOP functions
Parameter field: Data to be received:
Introduction This parameter only affects functions ASK_MSG and ASK_VALUE .
The data is located in an %MWi internal word table (length 2 table maximum).
Note: By operating the MMI console, the Data to be received parameter contains the value entered. If the status message variable is different from the data to be received, it is not changed by the entry. It only affects the display on the CCX 17.
282
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
Parameters field: Report
Introduction The report contains the parameters for managing asynchronous communication functions.
It is common to all integrated DOP functions.
Report structure The report uses a table of four internal words (%MW) containing different parameters such as: l l information on function activity, the exchange number which identifies the transaction in progress (useful when using the CANCEL communication function), l the exchange report split into two feedback codes: l l l l the communication level, the operation level, the value of the timeout which is used to monitor absent responses, the number of bytes to be sent and/or the number of bytes received.
The table below show the structure of the report.
Least significant byte Report management Word number Most significant byte
%MWi
%MWi+1
Exchange number
Operation report
%MWi+2
%MWi+3
Timeout
Length
Bit 0: activity bit System
Communication report System
User
System
%MWi:X0 activity bit
This bit indicates the state of the application of the communication function.
It is set on 1 when the function starts and falls back to 0 when a response is received, at the end of a timeout, or if the operation is cancelled (CANCEL function).
Exchange number
While a function is being sent, the system automatically assigns it a number which is used to identify the exchange.
This number serves as a reference to stop the exchange in progress, if necessary
(on using CANCEL).
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
283
Built-in DOP functions
Communication report
The communication report provides information on the communication aspect of the transaction.
This report is significant when the value of the activity bit changes from 1 to 0.
Note: The communication report does not affect the ADJUST function.
16#0005
16#xx06
16#0007
16#0008
16#0009
16#000A
16#000B
16#xx14
16#00FF
The different values of this report are indicated in the following table:
Value
16#xx00
16#0001
16#0002
16#0003
16#0004
Significance of the communication report (least significant byte)
Successful exchange
Stopping the exchange via a timeout
Stopping the exchange on user request (CANCEL function)
Incorrect address format (length is other than 6)
Incorrect destination address (addresses unauthorized for the CCX 17, e.g.: addresses being broadcast)
Invalid report
Specific parameters are invalid (particularly those concerning data to be sent)
Destination missing
Reserved
Size of reception buffer is insufficient
Size of transmission buffer is insufficient
System resources missing (communication saturation)
Negative response from the CCX 17 or from the PLC (ADJUST function)
Message refused (the CCX 17 is not in a state where it can process it)
Note: The function can detect an error in the parameters before activating the exchange. In this case the activity bit remains 0, the report is initialized with the values corresponding to the fault.
284
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
Operation report The operation report details the result of the operation on the remote application.
It is significant if the communication report has the following values: l l l
16#00,
16#06,
16#14 (except for the ADJUST function).
In other cases, the operation report is worth 0.
The different values of this report are indicated in the following table:
Communication report
(least significant byte)
Significance of the operation report
16#0000
16#1006
Generic positive result
Number of management words below 24
16#1106
16#1206
16#1306
16#1406
Non-existent type object to be read (greater than 8)
Inconsistency between bits RDEC and SINC
Invalid value to be written
Broadcast address (ALL) prohibited
16#6506
16#6606
16#6706
16#6806
16#6906
16#FF06
16#0114
16#0214
16#0414
16#0814
16#1414
16#1514
16#2014
{network.station} pair different from {0.254}
Data to be sent does not have a 16#CC17 marker
Invalid size of data to be sent
Invalid CCX 17 response
Length of "Data to be received" is insufficient
CCX 17 link inoperational
Command not recognized
Command queue capacity has been exceeded
Size of command is less that the minimum required size
Command refused because application transfer in progress
Inaccessible object
System error
Incorrect data
Integrated DOP functions
All
ADJUST only
All except ADJUST
ADJUST only
All except ADJUST
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
285
Built-in DOP functions
Timeout Timeout determines the maximum waiting time for a response. The time base for this parameter is 100 ms.
value 0 corresponds to an infinite wait value. In this case, the CANCEL function should be used.
Note: Value 0 is mandatory for functions ASK_MSG and ASK_VALUE .
If the timeout period has elapsed, the exchange terminates with an error report
(value 1). Similarly, the system refuses any response received at the end of the timeout.
Example
Start function
End of timeout
Activity bit = 0
Report = 1
Activity bit = 1
Timeout activation
Report set to zero
Allocation of exchange number
Receive response
Activity bit = 0
Stop timeout
Report update
Length
Note: The timeout value of a communication function must be sufficient to guarantee receiving a response to the question asked. This time period depends on the type of network and on the load in effect at the moment of the transaction.
The length parameter is used to store the number of bytes received after receiving a message for functions ASK_MSG and ASK_VALUE.
For the other functions, this parameter is worth 0.
286
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
Message field
Introduction
Message text
The message field groups together the different elements that make up the data to l l l be displayed on the CCX 17 screen.
These elements are: the message text, the different display attributes (position, size, etc.).
the message print command via the CCX 17.
This field is used to enter the message text that is to be displayed on the CCX 17 console.
The length of the message is 40 characters max.
The table below details the types of characters authorized.
Characters Comments
ASCII code above 32 (20h) Characters that can be displayed directly or by a combination of the and keys.
The _ sign (underscore) This character is reserved by the system to specify the optional display field for the variable associated with the message.
To specify the position of the variable field, the character must be entered in the appropriate place. The system then automatically calculates the number of necessary for the length of the variable display.
Overprint
Line
This parameter orders the command console to print a message when it appears on the console screen.
This parameter refers to alarm messages only. Enabling this parameter overprints the alarm message as soon as it appears.
This parameter specifies the line where the message must be displayed.
Position
Minimum
Default
Maximum
Value
1
1
16
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
287
Built-in DOP functions
Column This parameter specifies the column where the first message character is positioned.
Position
Minimum
Default
Maximum
Automatic (1)
Value(s)
1
1
40
Left, Centered, Right
Key
(1) This mode can be accessed by selecting automatic mode. It is local to the function.
Attributes
Size
Clear l l l
This parameter sets the attributes of the message display.
The different modes are:
Normal (when no check box has been selected),
Flashing,
Reverse video.
l l
This parameter specifies the format of all the text characters or the variable to be displayed.
Possible options are:
Standard,
Double.
This field is used to associate a single command that has been executed with a message before the message has been displayed. l l l
Options are:
None (no command is associated with a message),
Line (clears the line on which the message is to be displayed),
Screen (completely clears the screen).
Note: If no variable has been associated with a message, this command does not run (so use the PANEL_CMD function).
288
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
Field zone
Introduction
Field type
Symbol
Address
Comment
The Field zone is used to set the different parameters for the object which is l l l associated with a message.
These parameters are: the type of object, the display format,
...
This parameter sets the type of object which is associated with a message.
The length of the message is 40 characters max.
The table below shows the different object types possible.
Type of object
None
Address
Date
Time
Description
No field is associated with the message displayed.
The object associated with the message is a variable.
The message is correlated to the current PLC date.
The message is correlated to the current PLC time.
This parameter specifies the symbol of the variable associated with the message. It must be set in the station database. The address associated with this symbol is automatically taken into account on confirming the screen.
Note: In the case of a TSX Agent connected to the FIPIO bus, the variable is read in the bus master PLC, and not in the function sender PLC.
This parameter specifies the address of the variable associated with the message. l l l
When a symbol is associated with the variable, it is automatically taken into account.
Authorized objects can be: internal bits (%Mi), internal words (%MWi), double internal words (%MDi).
This field displays the variable comment for viewing. This comment is set in the application data editor.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
289
Built-in DOP functions
Refresh
Display format
This function specifies whether the variable contained in the message should be periodically refreshed while being displayed (function is active be default).
This parameter specifies the variable display format.
The table below shows the different formats available.
Format
ASCII
Numerical
Associated parameters
-
Signed (1)
Number of digits before the decimal point (1),
Number of digits after the decimal point (1),
Key
(1) these associated parameters can be accessed by clicking on the Modify button.
Note: From the parameters chosen, the software automatically calculates the display format.
290
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
27.2
Built-in DOP functions
Description of the built-in DOP functions
Introduction
Aim of this section
What's in this
Section?
This section describes the different built-in DOP functions.
This Section contains the following Maps:
Topic
List of the built-in DOP functions
SEND_MSG function
GET_MSG function
ASK_MSG function
SEND_ALARM function
DISPLAY_MSG function
DISPLAY_GRP function
DISPLAY_ALRM function
ASK_VALUE function
GET_VALUE function
CONTROL_LEDS function
ASSIGN_KEYS function
PANEL_CMD function
ADJUST function
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
291
Built-in DOP functions
List of the built-in DOP functions
Introduction The built-in DOP functions make it possible to: l control the main functions of a CCX 17 console not containing an application (this has been neither configured nor loaded by the external design software).
l command a CCX 17 console containing an application created with the MMI17
WIN or PL7 M17 OS/2 products.
The table below shows the various built-in DOP functions.
Function
SEND_MSG
GET_MSG
ASK_MSG
SEND_ALARM
DISPLAY_MSG
DISPLAY_GRP
DISPLAY_ALRM
ASK_VALUE
GET_VALUE
Description
Displaying status messages contained in the PLC memory on CCX 17 with or without variable.
X
Free entry (asynchronous) of PLC variable values associated with status messages.
X
Application
Witho ut
With
-
-
Blocking entry (synchronous) of a PLC variable value associated with status messages.
X
Displaying alarm messages contained in the PLC memory.
Displaying a status message contained in the memory of the CCX17.
X
-
Displaying a group of status messages contained in the CCX17 memory.
Displaying an alarm message contained in the CCX17 memory.
Blocking entry (synchronous) of values for the PLC variables associated with a status message contained in the CCX17 memory.
-
Free entry (asynchronous) of values for the PLC variables associated with a status message contained in the CCX17 memory.
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
CONTROL_LEDS Controlling the CCX 17 LEDs and relays.
ASSIGN_KEYS Configuring the CCX 17 command keys.
PANEL_CMD
ADJUST
Sending a generic command.
Language object adjustment.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
292
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
SEND_MSG function
Role
Implementation
Application example
This function is used to display a message with a dynamic variable (if necessary) on a CCX 17 console screen.
Implementation of the SEND_MSG function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP
The example given below makes use of the SEND_MSG function to display two status messages on the screen of a T CCX 1720 W console without an application.
This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).
Note: This same example, using a CCX 17 with application, is shown using the
DISPLAY_GRP function.
Application description Variables used l l
The aim of this example is, after setting application to RUN (%S13 =1): l initializing the PLC variables, l l writing the console address (ADR#0.04) in a word table, adjustment of timeout to 50 s, l conditions of execution, clearing the console screen (see PANEL_CMD function), to display status messages on the console screen: l Manu and Auto (standard format, positioned on line 1, Column 1), l l Four 4 (double format, automatic centering, Line 4), storing the function display execution.
%MW0:6: console address
%KW0:x: message 1 data to send
%KW40:x: message 2 data to send
%MW100:4: report
%MW100:X0: activity bit
%MW102: timeout
%M100:2: conditions of activation,
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
293
Built-in DOP functions
Introduction to the console
Manu Auto
Four 4
Fixed messages
Program corresponding to the application
( * INIT console address, condition, timeout
*)
IF %S1.3 THEN
%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;
%MW102:=500;
%M100:2:=0;
END_IF;
(*Write Auto, Manu and Four4 messages*)
IF NOT %M100 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN
SEND_MSG(%MW0:6,%KW0:28,%MW100:4);
SET %M100;
END_IF;
IF NOT %M101 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN
SEND_MSG(%MW0:6,%KW0:28,%MW100:4);
SET %M101;
END_IF;
Entry help screens corresponding to the application:
SEND_MSG
Parameters
Console address:
Data to Send:
%MW0
%KW0
6
28
Message
Text: Manu Auto
Position
Mode
Manual
Line 1 Column
Column alignment
1
Auto Left Centered Right
Report:
Attributes
Flashing
Clear
None
Field
Field type
None Address Date
Symbol:
Comment:
Display format
Address:
%MW100 4
Size
Standard
Double
Parameters
Line
Data to Send:
Message
Text: Time Four 4
Position
Mode
Update
Manual
Auto
Modify
%MW0
%KW40
Line
Column alignment
Left
4 Column
6
12
15
Centered Right
Report: %MW100 4
Attributes
Flashing
Reverse video
Size
Standard
Double
Clear
None Line Scree
OK Cancel Field
Field type
None Address
Address:
Date Time
Update Symbol:
Comment:
Display format
Modify
OK Cancel
294
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
GET_MSG function
Role This function is used to display, on the screen of a CCX 17 console, a message with a variable which can be modified by the operator.
The entry is made in multiple mode. The operator thus has the possibility of entering several variables successively, and the PLC program processes the entered value when the variable appears.
Implementation Implementation of the GET_MSG function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP
Specific parameter: Value
The Value parameter specifies the characteristics of the value which is associated to the variable.
If the choice is… The value…
Not checked entry on the CCX 17 console keyboard is free (1).
Limited
Increment entry on the CCX 17 console keyboard must be within the limits defined by the Min and Max values in the Entry field in order to be taken into account by the application (1).
display on the CCX 17 console screen is incremented or decremented from the value of the increment (1).
Key
(1) The value or the increment entered on the CCX 17 console keyboard follows the display format (e.g.: 9999.99), this determines the whole parts and decimal parts authorized by the user entry.
Example of application
The example given below makes use of the GET_MSG function to display a status message containing a variable which can be modified on the screen of a T CCX
1720 W console without application.
This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).
Note: This same example, using a CCX 17 with application, is shown using the
GET_VALUE function.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
295
Built-in DOP functions
Application description Variables used
Initial conditions l l l writing the console address (ADR#0.04) in a table of words, adjustment of timeout to 50 s, condition of execution,
Application: The aim of this example is, on user request: l to display a status message on the console screen: l Temperature = xxx °C (standard format, automatic centering,
Line 6, variable with attributes: increment of 50, three-digit integer, l periodic refreshing), storing the function execution.
%MW0:6: console address
%KW80:x: data to be sent.
%MW100:4: report
%MW100:X0: activity bit
%MW102: timeout
%M102: activation condition
%MW10: Temperature variable
Introduction to the console
Message displayed on user request
Temperature = xxx °C
Program corresponding to the application
( * INIT console address, condition, timeout
*)
IF %S1.3 THEN
%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;
%MW102:=500;
%M102:=0;
END_IF;
(* Write message Temp… *)
IF NOT %M102 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN
GET_MSG(%MW0:6,%KW100:28,%MW100:4);
SET %M102;
END_IF;
296
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
Entry help screen corresponding to the application:
GET_MSG
Parameters
Console address:
Data to Send:
%MW0
%KW1000 34
Message
Text: Temperature=____°C
Position
Mode
Manual
Line 6 Column
Column alignment
Auto Left
11
Centered Right
Report:
Attributes
Flashing
%MW100
Reverse video
Size
4
Standard
Double
Field
Symbol:
Comment:
Display format
Entry
Value
Not Checked
Address:
Limited
%MV10
999
Update
Modify
Increment
Increment: 50
Ok Cancel
297
Built-in DOP functions
ASK_MSG function
Role
Implementation
This function is used to display, on the screen of a CCX 17 console, a message with a variable which can be modified by the operator.
The entry is made in synchronized mode. Therefore, it is possible to make one single operator entry at each message display.
Implementation of the ASK_MSG function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP
Note: It is strongly advisable to assign parameters for the timeout for an infinite period (see
Parameters field: Report, p. 283 so as not to invalidate the ASK_MSG
function before the operator entry is made.
Specific parameter: Value
The Value parameter specifies the characteristics of the value which is associated to the variable.
If the choice is… The value…
Not checked entry on the CCX 17 console keyboard is free (1).
Limited
Increment entry on the CCX 17 console keyboard must be within the limits defined by the Min and Max values in the Entry field in order to be taken into account by the application (1).
display on the CCX 17 console screen is incremented or decremented from the value of the increment (1).
Key
(1) The value or the increment entered on the CCX 17 console keyboard follows the display format (e.g.: 9999.99), this determines the whole parts and decimal parts authorized by the user entry.
298
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Example
Built-in DOP functions
The illustration below shows an example of ASK_MSG function entry.
ASK_MSG
Parameters
Console address:
Data to Send:
ADR#,LL0.1.7,SYS
%KW20 34
Message
Text: ASK MSG:_
Position
Mode
Manual
Line 5 Column
Column alignment
Auto Left
5
Centered Right
Data to receive:
Report:
Attributes
Flashing
%KW200
%KW10
Reverse video
Size
2
4
Standard
Double
Field
Symbol:
Comment:
Display format
Entry
Value
Not Checked
Address:
Limited
%MV100
99
Modify
Increment
Ok Cancel
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
299
Built-in DOP functions
SEND_ALARM function
Role This function is used to activate, on the screen of a CCX 17 console, an alarm message present in the PLC.
Note: Alarm messages are always displayed on the second line of the screen
( Superimpose parameter activated). They are dated and timed by the console which synchronizes them with the PLC clock.
Implementation Implementation of the SEND_ALARM function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP
Note: It is imperative that the associated message in the CCX 17 console is deactivated on the disappearance of the alarm in the PLC (see function
PANEL_CMD), in order to enable a potential new activation of this alarm.
Specific parameter:
Alarm number
The Alarm number parameter defines the alarm message identifier.
Its value is between 900 and 999.
300
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Example of application
Built-in DOP functions
The example given below makes use of the SEND_ALARM function to display an alarm message on the screen of a T CCX 1720 W console without application.
This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).
Note: This same example, using a CCX 17 with application, is shown using the
DISPLAY_ALARM function.
Application description Variables used
Initial conditions l l l writing the console address (ADR#0.04) in a table of words, adjustment of timeout to 50 s, condition of execution,
Application: The aim of this example is: l l to detect overshoot of a temperature threshold (500 °C), to display an alarm message on the console screen: l Overheat four = xxx °C (standard format, automatic setting imposed by the function, variable with attributes: increment of 50, l three-digit integer), storing the function execution.
%MW0:6: console address
%KW80:x: data to be sent.
%MW100:4: report
%MW100:X0: activity bit
%MW102: timeout
%M103: activation condition
%MW10: Temperature variable
Introduction to the console
System display Alarm message
*ALARM*
Oven overheating = xxx °C
Program corresponding to the application
( *INIT console address, condition, timeout
*)
IF %S1.3 THEN
%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;
%MW102:=500;
%M103:=0;
END_IF;
(*Time overrun control*)
IF %MW10>500 THEN
SET %M12;
ELSE RESET %M12;
END_IF;
(* Write Surch alarm message… *)
IF %M12 AND NOT %M103 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN
SEND_ALARM(%MW0:6,%KW0:27,%MW100:4);
SET %M103;
END_IF;
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
301
Built-in DOP functions
Entry help screen corresponding to the application:
SEND_ALARM
Parameters
Console address:
Data to be sent:
%MW0
%KW120
6
29
Message
Text: Oven overheating = ____°C
Alarm number: 901
Size
Standard
Field
Symbol:
Comment:
Display format
Report:
Double
%MW110
Overprint
Address:
%MW10
999 Modify
4
OK Cancel
302
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
DISPLAY_MSG function
Role
Implementation Implementation of the DISPLAY_MSG function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP
Specific parameter:
Message number
The Message number parameter defines the alarm message identifier contained in the CCX 17 memory.
Its value is between 1 and 300.
Example
This function is used to display a message contained in the CCX 17 operator dialog console memory.
The illustration below shows an example of DISPLAY_MSG function entry.
DISPLAY_MSG
Parameters
Console address: ADR# 0.0.4
Data to be sent: %KW200
Report: %MW10 4
Value of data to be sent
Message number: 1
OK Cancel
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
303
Built-in DOP functions
DISPLAY_GRP function
Role This function is used to simultaneously display a group of messages contained in the CCX17 operator dialog console memory.
Implementation
Specific parameter:
Message group number
Implementation of the DISPLAY_MSG function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP
The Message group number parameter defines the group message identifier contained in the CCX 17 memory.
Its value is between 1 and 100.
Example of application
The example given below makes use of the DISPLAY_GRP function to display a group of two status messages on the screen of a T CCX 1720 W console containing an application.
This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).
Note: This same example, using a CCX 17 without application, is shown using the
SEND_MSG function.
Application description Variables used l l
The aim of this example is, after setting application to RUN (%S13 =1): l initializing the PLC variables, l writing the console address (ADR#0.04) in word table, l l adjustment of timeout to 50 s, condition of execution, clearing the console screen (see PANEL_CMD function), displaying the group of state n°1 messages contained in the CCX 17 application, for: l message n°1: Manu and Auto (standard format, moved to line 1, l l
Column 1), message n°2: Four 4 (double format, automatic centering, Line 4), storing the function execution.
%MW0:6: console address
%KW0:x: message 1 data to send
%MW100:4: report
%MW100:X0: activity bit
%MW102: timeout
%M100: activation condition
304
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
Introduction to the console
Manu Auto
Oven 4
Fixed messages
Program corresponding to the application
( * INIT console address, condition, timeout
*)
IF %S1.3 THEN
%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;
%MW102:=500;
%M100:=0;
END_IF;
(*Write Auto, Manu and Four4 messages*)
IF NOT %M100 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN
DISPLAY_GRP(%MW0:6,%KW0,%MW100:4);
SET %M100;
END_IF;
DISPLAY_GRP
Parameters
Console address: %MW10
Data to be sent: %KW0
Value of data to be sent
Message group number:
Entry help screen corresponding to the application:
1
6 Report: %MW100 4
OK Cancel
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
305
Built-in DOP functions
DISPLAY_ALRM function
Role
Implementation
This function is used to display an alarm message contained in the CCX17 operator dialog console memory.
Implementation of the DISPLAY_ALRM function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP
Note: It is imperative that the associated message in the CCX 17 console is deactivated on the disappearance of the alarm in the PLC (see function
PANEL_CMD), in order to enable a potential new activation of this alarm.
Specific parameter:
Alarm message number
The Alarm message number parameter defines the alarm message identifier contained in the CCX 17 memory.
Its value is between 1 and 300.
l l
An alarm can be activated exclusively by: letter box (requires MMI 17 WIN software), built-in DOP functions
Note: Only the alarms with numbers higher than the length of the letterbox can be accessed by the DISPLAY_ALRM function.
Application example
The example given below makes use of the DISPLAY_ALRM function to display an alarm message on the screen of a T CCX 1720 W console containing an application.
This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).
Note: This same example, using a CCX 17 with application, is shown using the
SEND_ALRM function.
306
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
Application description Variables used
Initial conditions l l l writing the console address (ADR#0.04) in a word table, adjustment of timeout to 50 s, condition of execution,
Application: The aim of this example is: l l to detect overshoot of a temperature threshold (500 °C), to display the alarm message contained in the CCX 17 application, for: l Overheat four = xxx °C (standard format, automatic setting imposed by the function, variable with attributes: increment of 50, three-digit integer), l storing the function execution.
%MW0:6: console address
%KW80:x: data to be sent.
%MW100:4: report
%MW100:X0: activity bit
%MW102: timeout
%M103: activation condition
%MW10: Temperature variable
Introduction to the console
System display Alarm message
*ALARM*
Oven overheating = xxx °C
Program corresponding to the application
( *INIT console address, condition, timeout
*)
IF %S1.3 THEN
%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;
%MW102:=500;
%M103:=0;
END_IF;
(*Time overrun control*)
IF %MW10>500 THEN
SET %M12;
ELSE RESET %M12;
END_IF;
(* Write Surch alarm message… *)
IF %M12 AND NOT %M103 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN
DISPLAY_ALRM(%MW0:6,%KW0,%MW100:4);
SET %M103;
END_IF;
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
307
Built-in DOP functions
Entry help screen corresponding to the application:
DISPLAY_ALRM
Parameters
Console address: %MW0
Data to be sent: %KW150
6 Report: %MW100 4
Value of data to be sent
Number of alarm message: 1
OK Cancel
308
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
ASK_VALUE function
Role
Implementation
This function is used to display a status message contained in the CCX17 operator dialog console memory on a CCX 17 console screen.
This message includes a variable, which can be modified by the operator.
The entry is made in synchronized mode. Therefore, it is possible to make one single operator entry at each message display.
Implementation of the ASK_VALUE function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP
Note: It is strongly advisable to assign parameters for the timeout for an infinite period (see
Parameters field: Report, p. 283 so as not to invalidate the
ASK_VALUE function before the operator entry is made.
Specific parameter:
Status message number
This parameter defines the message identifier contained in the CCX 17 memory.
Its value is between 1 and 300.
Example The illustration below shows an example of ASK_VALUE function entry.
ASK_VALUE
Parameters
Console address:
ADR# 0.0.4
Data to be sent: %KW20
Value of data to be sent
Status message number: 3
6 Data to receive:
Report:
%MW10
%MW20
2
4
OK Cancel
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
309
Built-in DOP functions
GET_VALUE function
Role
Implementation Implementation of the GET_VALUE function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP
Specific parameter:
Status message number
This parameter defines the message identifier contained in the CCX 17 memory.
Its value is between 1 and 300.
Application example
This function is used to display a status message contained in the CCX17 operator dialog console memory on a CCX 17 console screen.
This message includes a variable, which can be modified by the operator.
Entry is made in multiple mode. The operator thus has the possibility of entering several variables successively, and the PLC program processes the entered value when the variable appears.
The example given below makes use of the GET_VALUE function to display a status message containing a variable on the screen of a T CCX 1720 W console containing an application.
This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).
Note: This same example, using a CCX 17 without application, is shown using the
GET_MSG function.
Application description Variables used
Initial conditions l l l writing the console address (ADR#0.04) in a word table, adjustment of timeout to 50 s, condition of execution,
Application: The aim of this example is, on user request: l l initializing the PLC variables, displaying message n°4 contained in the CCX17 application, for: l Temperature = xxx °C (standard format, automatic centering,
Line 6, variable with attributes: increment of 50, three-digit integer, periodic updating), l storing the function execution.
%MW0:6: terminal address
%KW80:x: data to be sent.
%MW100:4: report
%MW100:X0: activity bit
%MW102: timeout
%M102: activation condition
%MW10: Temperature variable
310
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
Introduction to the console
Message displayed on user request
Temperature = xxx °C
Program corresponding to the application
( *INIT console address, condition, timeout
*)
IF %S1.3 THEN
%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;
%MW102:=500;
%M102:=0;
END_IF;
(* Write message Temp… *)
IF NOT %M102 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN
GET_VALUE(%MW0:6,%KW100:28,%MW100:4);
SET %M102;
END_IF;
Entry help screen corresponding to the application:
GET VALUE
Parameters
Console address: %MW0
Data to be sent: %KW100
Value of data to be sent
Status message number: 4
6 Report: %MW100 4
OK Cancel
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
311
Built-in DOP functions
CONTROL_LEDS function
Role This function is used to control some CCX 17 console functions.
These functions are: l l relay state (version 2.1 and above), state of the small luminous column LEDs.
The CONTROL_LEDS function is available whether or not the CCX 17 has an application.
Implementation Implementation of the CONTROL_LEDS function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP
Specific parameter: LED status
This parameter defines the current status of each LED.
l l l l the various states can be:
Unchanged,
Off,
Flashing,
On.
Specific parameter: Relay status l l l
This parameter defines the relay status.
the various states can be:
Unchanged,
Open,
Closed.
312
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
Application example
The example given below makes use of the CONTROL_LEDS function to control the
T CCX 1720 W console’s green LED status.
This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).
Application description
Initial conditions l l l writing the console address (ADR#0.04) in a word table, adjustment of timeout to 50 s, condition of execution,
Application: The aim of this example is, on rising edge of the variables: l l
Manu
Auto
: controlling the green LED in
: controlling the green LED in
Flashing
On mode
mode,
Variables used
%MW0:6: terminal address
%KW200:x:Manu status data to send
%KW210:x: Auto status data to send
%MW100:4: report
%MW100:X0: activity bit
%MW102: timeout
%M0:Manu variable
%M2: Auto variable
Introduction to the console
Green LED
Program corresponding to the application
( *INIT console address, condition, timeout
*)
IF %S1.3 THEN
%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;
%MW102:=500;
%M100:2:=0;
END_IF;
(*State of green LED*)
IF RE %M0 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN
CONTROL_LEDS(%MW0:6,%KW200:2,%MW100:4);
END_IF;
IF RE %M2 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN
CONTROL_LEDS(%MW0:6,%KW210:2,%MW100:4);
END_IF;
%M0:=%M0;
%M2:=%M2;
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
313
Built-in DOP functions
Entry help screens corresponding to the application:
CONTROL_LEDS
Parameters
Console address:
Data to Send:
%MW0
%KW200
LED status
6
2
Report: %MW100 4
Unchanged Off Flashing On
Unchanged Off
Unchanged
Relay status
Unchanged
Off
OK
Flashing On
Open
Flashing
Cancel
On
CONTROL_LEDS
Parameters
Closed
%MW0
Data to Send: %KW210
LED status
Unchanged Off
6
2
Unchanged Off
Report:
Flashing
Flashing
Flashing Unchanged
Relay status
Unchanged
Off
OK
Open
Cancel
%MW100 4
On
On
On
Closed
314
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
ASSIGN_KEYS function
Role This function is used to configure all or some of the command keys of a CCX 17 console by linking them to internal bits from the communication master PLC.
Using this function globally modifies the configuration of the affected command keys.
The maximum number of keys that can be configured is twelve, however, only the keys present on the console receiving the command are taken into account.
The ASSIGN_KEYS function is available whether or not the CCX 17 has an application.
Parameters Zone The principle of implementing the Parameters zone is elaborated in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP
Zone: Set by l l
This zone is used to specify which out of the PLC or CCX 17 contains the key configuration data.
PLC: the data considered is that entered in the Command key zones,
CCX 17 the data considered is that from the application contained in the console.
Zone: Command key x
Characteristics
Inhibit
Action
Address
Symbol
This zone is used to define the characteristics associated with each key.
The table below shows the various possible characteristics.
Meaning
Invalidates the key status. Its confirmation inhibits the action and address / symbol fields.
Defines the operating mode of the key.
Selecting the mode on edge means that pushing in the key causes the associated bit to be set to 1, and releasing it causes it to be set to 0.
Choosing counter output mode means that pushing in the key changes the bit status. The default value is on edge.
Specifies the %Mi internal bit address associated with the key. If the symbol associated with this bit exists in the station database, it is automatically taken into account during address confirmation.
Specifies the symbol associated with the bit. The address associated with this symbol is automatically taken into account.
Zone: Display command keys
Command keys are configured in groups of four.
This zone is used to access the various groups of keys.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
315
Built-in DOP functions
Application example
The example given below makes use of the ASSIGN_KEYS function to assign a function to the T CCX 1720 W console command keys1 and 2.
This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).
Note: For a CCX 17 with application, the assignment of command keys can be included here, making this PLC application unnecessary.
Application description l l l
Initial conditions l l l writing the console address (ADR#0.0.4) in a word table, adjustment of timeout to 50 s, condition of execution,
Application: The aim of this example is: to assign the %M0 variable to command key 1, to assign the %M2 variable to command key 2, storing the function execution.
Variables used
%MW0:6: terminal address
%KW240:x: data to be sent.
%MW100:4: report
%MW100:X0: activity bit
%MW102: timeout
%M0: Manu variable
%M2: Auto variable
%M12: condition of execution
%M108: condition of execution
Introduction to the console
Key 1 Key 2
Program corresponding to the application
( * INIT console address, condition, timeout
*)
IF %S1.3 THEN
%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;
%MW102:=500;
%M108:=0;
END_IF;
(* Assign command keys *)
IF %M12 AND NOT %M108 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN
ASSIGN_KEYS(%MW0:6,%KW240:16,%MW100:4);
END_IF;
316
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Entry help screens corresponding to the application:
ASSIGN_KEYS
Parameters
Console address:
Data to Send:
%MW0
%KW240
Set by
PLC
6
16
Report:
CCX17
%MW100 4
Command key 1
Inhibit
Symbol: Manual
Address:
%MV0
Command key 3
Inhibit
Symbol:
Address:
Action
On edge
On state
Action
On edge
On state
Command key 2
Inhibit
Symbol: Auto
Address:
%M2
Command key 4
Inhibit
Symbol:
Address:
Action
On edge
On state
Action
On edge
On state
Key 9 to 12...
Key 1 to 4...
Display command keys
OK
Key 5 to 8...
Cancel
Built-in DOP functions
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
317
Built-in DOP functions
PANEL_CMD function
Role This function is used to send various simple commands of the following type to the l l l l
MMI console: clearing a line or the screen, printing or clearing the operator entry log, printing or clearing the alarms log, alarm management.
Note: The PANEL_CMD function is available whether or not the CCX 17 has an application.
Parameters field The principle of implementing the Parameters field is elaborated in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP
Field: Command This field is used to set the command associated with the PANEL_CMD function.
l l
For: clearing a line; the line number must be specified, canceling an alarm; you must designate the alarm number which corresponds to identifier given while using SEND_ALRM or DISPLAY_ALRM.
318
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
Application example
The example below shows the implementation of the PANEL_CMD function for the purpose of canceling a T CCX 1720 W console alarm.
This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).
Application description l l l
Initial conditions l l l writing the console address (ADR#0.04) in a word table, adjustment of timeout to 50 s, condition of execution,
Application: The aim of this example is: wiping the console screen on user demand, canceling the alarm on fault acknowledgement, storing the function execution.
Variables used
%MW0:6: console address
%KW350:x: Wipe data to be sent,
%KW360:x: Cancel data to be sent,
%MW100:4: report
%MW100:X0: activity bit
%MW102: timeout
%M102: activation condition
%M100: fault acknowledgement
Program corresponding to the application
( *INIT console address, condition, timeout *)
IF %S1.3 THEN
%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;
%MW102:=500;
%M120:2:=0;
END_IF;
(* Clear alarm … *)
IF %M100 AND NOT %M120 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN
PANEL_CMD(%MW0:6,%KW360:3,%MW100:4);
SET %M120
END_IF;
* Clear screen *)
IF %M102 AND NOT %M121 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN
PANEL_CMD(%MW0:6,%KW350:3,%MW100:4);
SET %M121;
END_IF;
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
319
Built-in DOP functions
Entry help screens corresponding to the application:
PANEL-CMD
Parameters
Console address:
Data to be sent:
%MW0
%KW40
Commands
Clear
Screen
Entry log
Alarm log
Alarm management
Cancel an Alarm
6
2
Line
OK
Report:
Line number
%MW100
1
4
Clear
Clear
Alarm number
Cancel
PANEL-CMD
Parameters
Console address:
Data to be sent:
1
Commands
ADR#0.0.4
%KW350
Clear
Screen
Entry log
Alarm log
Alarm management
Cancel an Alarm
2
Line
Clear
Clear
Report:
Line number
Alarm number
%MW50 4
1
1
OK Cancel
320
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
ADJUST function
Role This function is used to adjust (read and write) language objects (one object at a time) from a CCX 17 or a MAGELIS, by controlling internal words in the PLC memory.
The language objects which can be adjusted are: l l l internal bits (%Mi), internal words or double words (%MWi, %MDi), rack or remote inputs/outputs (%I, %Q, %IW, %QW, %ID, %QD).
l l l
Note: It is strongly advised: to only execute one instance of the ADJUST function per cycle, to only execute the ADJUST function every n cycles.
to assign parameters to the ADJUST function with consecutive words, so as to optimize the reading of internal words on CCX 17 and MAGELIS.
Activating the function (EN)
Read / Write
(R_W)
This parameter is used to execute the ADJUST function.
l l
The types of objects assigned to this parameter may be: an internal bit (%Mi), an internal word extract bit (%MWi:Xj).
This parameter defines the type of operation to be carried out: l l l l read: bit = 0, write: bit = 1.
The types of objects assigned to this parameter may be: an internal bit (%Mi), an internal word extract bit (%MWi:Xj).
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
321
Built-in DOP functions
Type of object
(TYPE)
This parameter defines the type of object to be read or written.
The types of objects assigned to this parameter may be: l an internal word (%MWi), l an immediate value.
The table below shows the different types of objects which can be controlled using the ADJUST function.
Type of object
%Mi
%MWi
%MDi
%I
%Q
2
3
4
0
1
Value of internal word or immediate value
Type of object
%IW
%QW
%ID
%QD
7
8
5
6
Value of internal word or immediate value
322
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
Object address
(ADR)
This parameter contains the address of the object to be read or written.
The object type assigned to this parameter is a table of eight internal words (%MWi).
The table below shows the content of the different words in the table.
This word contains… Possible values of the word Word order number
Word 0
Word 1
Word 2
Word 3
Word 4
Word 5
Word 6
Word 7 the rack number where the language object concerned is situated the number corresponding to the position in the rack of the I/O module or of the processor in which the language object concerned is situated
0 : bit objects, internal words or double words, I/O objects whose operations function is registered in rack 0.
n : other rack I/O objects.
0 : bit objects, internal words and double words, I/O objects whose operations function is associated to channels 1 and
2 of the processor registered at position 0 in the rack.
1 : I/O objects whose operations function is associated to channels 1 and 2 of the processor registered at position 1 the rack.
n : other rack I/O objects.
the channel number in the module where the language object concerned is situated
0 : bit objects, internal words and double words.
1 : I/O objects whose operations function is associated to channel 1 of the processor (communication functions with
PCMCIA).
2 : I/O objects whose operations function is associated to channel 2 of the processor (FIPIO link).
n : other rack I/O objects.
the rank of the I/O object or the number of the internal language object concerned.
0 or n : bit objects, internal words or double words, I/O objects with significant rank.
0 : Other I/O objects.
the connection point number of the device on the FIPIO bus or the rank of the NANET object.
n : NANET or FIPIO objects.
0 : not significant.
the position of the FIPIO module.
0 : basic or not significant module.
1 : extension module the channel number in the FIPIO module or the slave bit on the AS-i bus.
n : AS-i or FIPIO objects.
0 : not significant.
the slave number of the AS-i and NANET buses.
n : AS-i or NANET objects.
0 : not significant.
Value to write
(VAL)
This parameter contains the value to write in the object.
The object type assigned to this parameter is a double word (%MDi).
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
323
Built-in DOP functions
Set at 1, or
Incrementation
(SINC) l l
Depending on the type of object to be written, this parameter is used: to set the bit value (%Mi, %Q), to increment by 1 the value of the word or double word (%MWi, %MDi, %QW,
%QD).
Note: the R_W parameter must be set to 1.
The object type assigned to this parameter is an internal bit (%Mi).
Set to 0 or
Decrementation
(RDEC) l l
Depending on the type of object to be written, this parameter is used: to clear the bit value (%Mi, %Q), to decrement by 1 the value of the word or double word (%MWi, %MDi, %QW,
%QD).
Note: the R_W parameter must be set to 1.
The object type assigned to this parameter is an internal bit (%Mi).
This parameter contains the parameter value which has just been read.
The object type assigned to this parameter is a double word (%MDi).
Value of the object read
(VRET)
Management parameters
(GEST)
Examples
The object type assigned to this parameter is a table of 24 internal words (%MWi).
The illustration below shows an example of ADJUST function entry.
Display the call
ADJUST( %MW20:X0.%MW20:X1.%MW21.%MW22:8.%MD30.%MW20:X2.%MW20:X3.%MD32.%MW34:24 )
324
To read the internal double word %MD12, the following values would need to be entered:
Parameter Language object
EN
R_W
TYPE
%MW20:X0
%MW20:X1
%MW21
1
0
Value to be entered
:
2
Comment
Executing the ADJUST function
Read operation
Type of object: %MD
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Parameter
ADR
VAL
SINC
RDEC
VRET
MAN
Language object
%MW22
%MW23
%MW24
%MW25
%MW26
%MW27
%MW28
%MW29
%MD30
%MW20:X2
%MW20:X3
%MD32
%MD34:24
Built-in DOP functions
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
12
0
0
Value to be entered
:
Comment
Not significant
Not significant
Not significant
Object number (%MD12)
Not significant
Not significant
Not significant
Not significant
Not significant
Not significant
Not significant
Value of the object read
Buffer parameter for receiving and sending requests
To write value 15 in the rack output word %QW3.2, the following values need to be entered:
Parameter Language object
EN
R_W
TYPE
ADR
VAL
%MW20:X0
%MW20:X1
%MW21
%MW22
%MW23
%MW24
%MW25
%MW26
%MW27
%MW28
%MW29
%MD30
0
0
0
0
0
15
3
2
6
0
1
1
Value to be entered
:
Comment
Executing the ADJUST function
Write operation
Type of object: %QW
Rack number
Module position
Channel number
Not significant
Not significant
Not significant
Not significant
Not significant
Value to write
325
Built-in DOP functions
Parameter
SINC
RDEC
VRET
MAN
Language object
%MW20:X2
%MW20:X3
%MD32
%MD34:24
0
0
Value to be entered
:
Comment
Not significant
Not significant
Value of the object read
Buffer parameter for receiving and sending requests
To increment the output word on FIPIO %QW\1.2.12\0.1, the following values would need to be entered:
Parameter Language object
EN
R_W
TYPE
ADR
VAL
SINC
RDEC
VRET
MAN
%MW20:X0
%MW20:X1
%MW21
%MW22
%MW23
%MW24
%MW25
%MW26
%MW27
%MW28
%MW29
%MD30
%MW20:X2
%MW20:X3
%MD32
%MD34:24
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
12
1
2
6
0
1
1
Value to be entered
:
Comment
Executing the ADJUST function
Write operation
Type of object: %QW
Not significant
Processor address
Channel number of built-in FIPIO link
Not significant
Connection point number
Module number: Standard
Channel number
Not significant
Not significant
Incrementing the word value by 1
Not significant
Not significant
Buffer parameter for receiving and sending requests
326
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Built-in DOP functions
To set to 0 the output bit on the AS-i %Q\105.0\7.2 bus, the following values need to be entered:
Parameter Language object
EN
R_W
TYPE
ADR
VAL
SINC
RDEC
VRET
MAN
%MW20:X0
%MW20:X1
%MW21
%MW22
%MW23
%MW24
%MW25
%MW26
%MW27
%MW28
%MW29
%MD30
%MW20:X2
%MW20:X3
%MD32
%MD34:24
0
1
7
0
0
2
0
0
5
0
4
1
1
1
Value to be entered
:
Comment
Executing the ADJUST function
Write operation
Type of object: %Q
Rack number
Module position
Channel number
Not significant
Not significant
Not significant
Bit rank (slave input/output)
Slave number
Not significant
Not significant
Output RESET
Not significant
Buffer parameter for receiving and sending requests
To decrement the output word on NANET %QW\4.0\2.1, the following values would need to be entered:
Parameter Language object
EN
R_W
TYPE
%MW20:X0
%MW20:X1
%MW21
1
1
Value to be entered
:
6
Comment
Executing the ADJUST function
Write operation
Type of object: %QW
327
Built-in DOP functions
Parameter
ADR
VAL
SINC
RDEC
VRET
MAN
Language object
%MW22
%MW23
%MW24
%MW25
%MW26
%MW27
%MW28
%MW29
%MD30
%MW20:X2
%MW20:X3
%MD32
%MD34:24
0
0
0
2
1
0
0
0
1
0
4
Value to be entered
:
Comment
Rack number
Module position
Channel number
NANET object rank (word number)
Not significant
Not significant
Not significant
Slave number
Not significant
Not significant
Decrementing the word value by 1
Not significant
Buffer parameter for receiving and sending requests
328
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Appendices
28
Introduction
Aim of this chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter introduces the supplementary information for installing DOP functions.
This Chapter contains the following Sections:
Section
28.1
28.2
Topic
Precautions for DOP use
Description of the built-in DOP functions "Data to send" parameter coding
Page
329
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Appendices
28.1
Precautions for DOP use
Precautions for DOP use
Introduction
List of precautions
The list below is not exhaustive, however, it does group together the errors most frequently encountered whilst installing DOP functions in an application. l l l l l l l l l
Do not forget to initialize the Time-out parameter (%MWi+2) before starting the
Operator Dialogue function. For the ASK_MSG or ASK_VALUE functions, the value has to be 0.
If you use the same word to save each function’s report, you must then test the activity bit (%MWi:X0) at value 0 before starting another function.
Synchronize the start of the different Built-in DOP functions in order that the CCX
17 console command queue does not become full.
Remember to correctly calculate the size of the %KWi internal constants for displaying the data to be sent.
Do not hesitate to allow a margin for error when allocating the data to be sent
(%KWi:n). In fact, if you need to modify the text name, there will be no overlap between the different %KWi:n references.
The maximum size for the Built-in DOP functions is 47 words.
Warning, it is impossible to create a Built-in DOP function in line modification mode, if the application located in the PLC does not already contain a copy of this function.
During power outage or communication loss, the application has to reset the CCX
17 in a coherent state (assigning buttons and messages to the screen).
Canceling modifications or deleting a rung or phrase (List or Text) does not cancel initialization of the %KWi variables.
330
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
28.2
Appendices
Description of the built-in DOP functions "Data to send" parameter coding
Introduction
Aim of this section
What's in this
Section?
This section describes the Data to send parameter.
It is intended for application developers who want to install built-in DOP functions without using the input help screens.
This Section contains the following Maps:
Topic
PLC status message display: SEND_MSG function
PLC checked status message entry: ASK_MSG and GET_MSG function
PLC alarm message display: SEND_ALARM function
Display of status, alarm or a group of messages contained in the CCX 17 memory: ASK_VALUE, DISPLAY_MSG, GET_VALUE, DISPLAY_ALRM and
DISPLAY_GRP functions
Page
Display of luminous column LEDS: CONTROL_LEDS function
Configuring command keys: ASSIGN_KEYS function
Generic send command: PANEL_CMD function
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
331
Appendices
PLC status message display: SEND_MSG function
Introduction Status messages can be constructed from the PLC application by creating the send using internal words (%Mwi) as intermediaries to display them on a CCX17 console screen. This is the role of the SEND_MSG function.
Data to send parameter coding
Meaning
1
2
Word number
3
4 to P
P +1
P +2
P +3
P +4
P+5
P+6
P+7
P
The table below shows the significance of the different words which constitute the following parameter: Data to send (47 words maximum).
contains a marker of value 16#CC17, contains value 0 contains the length in bytes and the zone of the following words, contain the message text to send, this being the characters that are underlined representing the characters expected during the display of a variable. The maximum length of this text is 40 characters.
If the text is composed of an odd number of characters, the last byte is worth 0, if the text is of even length and if it is less than 39 characters, the last byte must contain the value 0, contains the line number where the message must be displayed, contains the column number where the start of the message must be displayed,
This two word zone (four characters) contains the message characteristics and is structured as follows:
Character 1
Character 2
Characters 3 and
4
This character (in capitals) corresponds to a video attribute: l l l l
B = blinking,
R = reverse video,
A = blinking and reverse video,
N = no attribute
This character (in capitals) corresponds to the character font size: l l
S = normal size,
D = double width or height corresponds to the printing option: l l
Y followed by a space = yes,
N followed by a space = no.
If you do not want to display a variable, the following word must be at 0 (in this instance, following parameters is ignored), otherwise the following parameters must be added: contains the position of the variable to display, counted in number of characters in relation to the start of the message.
contains the number of characters to display for the variable.
Number of words containing the text of the message to send (see line 4 to P).
332
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Word number
P+8
P
Meaning
P+9
P+10 and 11 contain the type of entry field: l l l l l
BIT +space = bit type,
ANA + space = word type,
LNG + space = double word type,
DAY + space = date type,
HOU + space = hour type.
P+12 contains value 0.
P+13 contains a supplementary command: l l l
0: no command,
1: clear screen,
2: clear the line before the display.
contains the value 16#0030.
P+14 contains the type of variable to display: l l l
B +space = bit type,
W + space = word type,
DW = double word type,
Note: for a Date or Hour type, this word contains value 0.
contains: l l the address index of the variable to display for a bit, word or double word type, value –1 for a date or hour type.
Number of words containing the text of the message to send (see line 4 to P).
Appendices
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
333
Appendices
Word number
Meaning
P+15 and 16 contain the display format for the variable and are structured in the following ways:
Byte 1 specifies if the variable is signed (sign +), or not (space),
Bytes 2 and 3 specifies the display format:
Byte 2 Byte 2
ASCII or DIGITAL without decimal places the ASCII code for the space, that being 20
DIGITAL with less than ten decimal places
DIGITAL with at least ten decimal places the ASCII code for the space, that being 20 the ASCII code for the number of tens of decimal places the ASCII code for the number of decimal places the ASCII code for the number of decimal place units
P+17
P+18
Byte 4 specifies the display type: l l l
N = no format,
D = Digital,
A = ASCII define if the variable must be refreshed or not: l l
Y + space = yes,
N + space = no.
contains the value N + space,
P+19 to 25 contain the value 0 (7 words).
P Number of words containing the text of the message to send (see line 4 to P).
334
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Example of use
Appendices
The example below shows the values corresponding to the word table %MW0:12
(data to send) of the SEND_MSG(ADR#0.0.4,%MW0:12,%MW100:4) function;
Value Comment Word number
%MW0
%MW1
%MW2
%MW3
%MW4
%MW5
%MW6
%MW7
%MW8
%MW9
%MW10
%MW11
15
ND
N sp
0
0
2 ur sp 4
16#CC17
0
18
Fo
Marker
Imposed value
Byte size of the following zone which includes nine words
Message text
Message text (continued)
Message text (end)
End of message mark
Message position (line number)
Message position (column number)
Message characteristics (no attribute or double font)
Message characteristic (no printing)
The message includes no variable
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
335
Appendices
PLC checked status message entry: ASK_MSG and GET_MSG function
Introduction Checked status messages can be constructed from the PLC application by creating the send using internal words (%MWi) as intermediaries to display them on a CCX17 console screen. This is the role of the ASK_MSG and GET_MSG functions.
Data to send parameter coding
Meaning
1
2
Word number
The table below shows the significance of the different words which constitute the following parameter: Data to send (47 words maximum).
3
4 to P
P +1
P +2
P +3
P +4
P+5
P+6
P contains a marker of value 16#CC17, contains the command type: l l
33 = command number for ASK_MSG,
6 = command number for GET_MSG, contains the length in bytes and the zone of the following words, contain the message text to send, this being the characters that are underlined representing the characters expected during the display of a variable. The maximum length of this text is 40 characters.
If the text is composed of an odd number of characters, the last byte is worth 0, if the text is of even length and if it is less than 39 characters, the last byte must contain the value 0, contains the line number where the message must be displayed, contains the column number where the start of the message must be displayed,
This two word zone (four characters) contains the message characteristics and is structured as follows:
Character 1
Character 2
Characters 3 and
4
This character (in capitals) corresponds to a video attribute: l l l l
B = blinking,
R = reverse video,
A = blinking and reverse video,
N = no attribute
This character (in capitals) corresponds to the character font size: l l
S = normal size,
D = double width or height corresponds to the printing option: l l
Y followed by a space = yes,
N followed by a space = no.
contains the position of the variable to display, counted in number of characters in relation to the start of the message.
contains the number of characters to display for the variable.
Number of words containing the text of the message to send (see line 4 to P).
336
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Word number
P+7
P+8
P+9
P+10
P+11
P+12
P+13
P+14
P+15
P
Appendices
Meaning contains a supplementary command: l l
0: no command (ASK_MSG synchronized entry),
24: free entry authorized after display (GET_MSG multiple entry).
contains the value 16#0030.
contain the type of entry field (in Upper case): l l l
BIT +space = bit type,
ANA + space = word type,
LNG + space = double word type.
contains value 0.
contains the type of variable to display (in Upper case): l l l
B +space = bit type,
W + space = word type,
DW = double word type, contains the address index of the variable to display.
contain the display format for the variable and are structured in the following ways:
Byte 1 specifies if the variable is signed (sign +), or not (space),
Bytes 2 and 3 specifies the display format:
Byte 2 Byte 3
ASCII or DIGITAL without decimal places the ASCII code for the space, that being 20
DIGITAL with less than ten decimal places
DIGITAL with at least ten decimal places the ASCII code for the space, that being 20 the ASCII code for the number of tens of decimal places the ASCII code for the number of decimal places the ASCII code for the number of decimal place units
Byte 4 specifies the display type: l l l
N = no format,
D = Digital,
A = ASCII
Number of words containing the text of the message to send (see line 4 to P).
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
337
Appendices
Word number
Meaning
P+16
P+17 defines whether or not the variable must be updated: l l
Y + space = yes,
N + space = no.
defines the field attributes: l l
I + space = increment,
L + space = others.
P+18 and 19 define the limit type: l l l l
0 = unlimited,
1 = minimum limit only,
2 = maximum limit only,
3 = minimum and maximum limit.
P+20 and 21 contain the minimum limit value.
P+22 and 23 contain the maximum limit value.
P+24 and 25 contain the increment value.
P Number of words containing the text of the message to send (see line 4 to P).
338
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Example of use
Appendices
The example below shows the values corresponding to the word table %MW0:38
(data to send) of the GET_MSG(ADR#0.0.4,%MW0:38,%MW100:4) function;
Value Comment
%MW14
%MW15
%MW16
%MW17
%MW18
%MW19
%MW20
%MW21
%MW22
%MW23
%MW24
%MW25
%MW26
%MW27
%MW6
%MW7
%MW8
%MW9
%MW10
%MW11
%MW12
%MW13
Word number
%MW0
%MW1
%MW2
%MW3
%MW4
%MW5
%MW28
%MW29
NS
N sp
15
3
24
16#0030
AN
A sp
0
W sp
10 espesp
°C
0
3
11 e esp
= sp
__
_ sp mp er at ur
16#CC17
6
70
Te sp D
Y esp
Marker
Command number for GET_MSG
Byte size of the following zone which includes 35 word
Message text
Message text (continued)
Message text (continued)
Message text (continued)
Message text (continued)
Message text (continued)
Message text (continued)
Message text (continued)
Message text (continued)
Message text (end)
End of message mark
Text position (line number)
Text position (column number)
Message characteristics (no attribute or double font)
Message characteristic (no printing)
Position of the variable from the start of the message
Number of characters to display
Additional command (entered after display)
Reserved value
Type of entry field (AN = start of ANA)
Type of entry field (continued)
Reserved value
Type of variable to display (W = word type variable)
Address index for the variable to display (%MW10)
Display format (sp for a non signed variable, sp for the start of the decoding of decimal places after the point)
Display format continued (sp for the end of the coding of the number of digits after the point, D for the decimal format)
The variable must be updated
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
339
Appendices
Word number
%MW30
%MW31
%MD32
%MD34
%MD36
Value
0
0
I esp
0
50
Comment
Entry is incremental
The variable is not limited
Minimum limit value
Maximum limit value
Increment value
340
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Appendices
PLC alarm message display: SEND_ALARM function
Introduction Alarm messages can be constructed from the PLC application by creating the send using internal words (%MWi) as intermediaries to display them on a CCX17 console screen. This is the role of the SEND_ALARM function.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
341
Appendices
Data to send parameter coding
The table below shows the significance of the different words which constitute the following parameter: Data to send (37 words maximum).
3
4
1
2
Word number
Meaning
5 to P contain the message text to send, this being the characters that are underlined representing the characters expected during the display of a variable. The maximum length of this text is 40 characters.
If the text is composed of an odd number of characters, the last byte is worth 0, if the text is of even length and if it is less than 39 characters, the last byte must contain the value 0,
P +1 and 2 This two word zone (four characters) contains the message characteristics and is structured as follows:
P+3
P+4
Character 1
Character 2
This character (in capitals) corresponds to the character font size: l l
S = normal size,
D = double width or height.
corresponds to the printing option: l l
Y = yes,
N = no.
Characters 3 and
4 correspond to the overprinting option: l l
Y followed by a space = yes,
N followed by a space = no.
If you do not want to display a variable, the following word must be at 0 (in this instance, following parameters is ignored), otherwise the following parameters must be added: contains the position of the variable to display, counted in number of characters in relation to the start of the message.
P+5
P+6
P+7 and 8
P+9
P+10
P contains a marker of value 16#CC17, contains value 0 contains the length in bytes and the zone of the following words, contains the imaginary number given to the alarm message (this word is used after deactivating the alarm if necessary). The value of this word must be between 900 and 999.
contains the number of characters to display for the variable.
contains the value 16#0030.
contain the type of entry field: l l l
BIT +space = bit type,
ANA + space = word type,
LNG + space = double word type, contains value 0.
contains the type of variable to display: l l l
B +space = bit type,
W + space = word type,
DW = double word type,
Number of words containing the text of the message to send (see line 5 to P).
342
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Appendices
Word number
Meaning
P+11 contains the address index of the variable to display.
P+12and 13 contain the display format for the variable and are structured in the following ways:
P
Byte 1
Bytes 2 and 3 specifies if the variable is signed (sign +), or not (space), specifies the display format:
Byte 2 Byte 3
ASCII or DIGITAL without decimal places the ASCII code for the space, that being 20
DIGITAL with less than ten decimal places
DIGITAL with at least ten decimal places the ASCII code for the space, that being 20 the ASCII code for the number of tens of decimal places the ASCII code for the number of decimal places the ASCII code for the number of decimal place units
Byte 4 specifies the display type: l l l
N = no format,
D = Digital,
A = ASCII
Number of words containing the text of the message to send (see line 5 to P).
Example of use The example below shows the values corresponding to the word table %MW0:29
(data to send) of the SEND_ALARM(ADR#0.0.4,%MW0:29,%MW100:4) function;
Value Comment Word number
%MW0
%MW1
%MW2
%MW3
%MW4
%MW5
%MW6
%MW7
%MW8
%MW9
%MW10
%MW11 fe sp f or r sp
Su rc ha uf
16#CC17
0
52
900
Marker
Imposed value
Byte size of the following zone which includes 26 word
Alarm message number
Message text
Message text (continued)
Message text (continued)
Message text (continued)
Message text (continued)
Message text (continued)
Message text (continued)
Message text (continued)
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
343
Appendices
%MW18
%MW19
%MW20
%MW21
%MW22
%MW23
%MW24
%MW25
%MW26
%MW27
Word number
%MW12
%MW13
%MW14
%MW15
%MW16
%MW17
Value
3
16#0030
AN
A sp
0
W sp
10 espesp
0
SY
Y sp
19
= sp
__
_ sp
°C
%MW28 sp D
Comment
Message text (continued)
Message text (continued)
Message text (continued)
Message text (end)
End of message mark
Message characteristic (Normal size, printing)
Message characteristic (overprinting)
Position of the variable from the start of the message
Number of characters to display
Reserved value
Type of entry field (AN = start of ANA)
Type of entry field (continued)
Reserved value
Type of variable to display (W = word type variable)
Address index for the variable to display (%MW10)
Display format (sp for a non signed variable, sp for the start of the decoding of decimal places after the point)
Display format continued (sp for the end of the coding of the number of digits after the point, D for the decimal format)
344
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Appendices
Display of status, alarm or a group of messages contained in the CCX 17 memory: ASK_VALUE, DISPLAY_MSG, GET_VALUE, DISPLAY_ALRM and
DISPLAY_GRP functions
Introduction
Example of use l l l
For these functions it is possible to send them by using internal words (%MWi) as intermediaries.
The Data to send parameter requires one word which contains accordingly:
The status message number,
Alarm message number,
Message group number
The example below shows an example of a function using the word %MW0 (data to send).
DISPLAY_GRP(ADR#0.0.4,%MW0,%MW100:4) with %MW0:=3
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
345
Appendices
Display of luminous column LEDS: CONTROL_LEDS function
Introduction It is possible to set the relay status (version 2.1 and above) and the LEDs on the luminous screen of a CCX17 console, then to send them using internal words
(%MWi) as intermediaries. This is the role of the CONTROL_LEDS function.
Data to send parameter coding
Meaning
1
2
Word number
The table below shows the significance of the different words which constitute the following parameter: Data to send (2 words).
contains a marker of value 16#CC17, indicates the coding of each LED as well as the relay state to send to the terminal.
l l l l bits 0 to 3: green LED status, bits 4 to 7: yellow LED status, bits 8 to 11: red LED status, bits 12 to 15: relay status, the state of each of the LEDS is coded on four bits as follows: l l l l
0000: unchanged LED status,
0001: LED off,
0010: LED on,
1111: LED flashing.
the relay status is coded on bits 12 to 15 as follows: the state of each of the indicators is coded on four bits as follows: l l l
0000: unchanged relay status,
0001: open relay status,
0010: closed relay status.
Example of use The example below shows the values corresponding to the word table %MW0:2
(data to send) of the CONTROL_1EDS(ADR#0.0.4,%MW0:2,%MW100:4) function;
Value Comment Word number
%MW0
%MW1
16#CC17
16#1112
Marker
Green LEDS on, yellow and red off, open relay status
346
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Appendices
Configuring command keys: ASSIGN_KEYS function
Introduction It is possible to set the configuration of the command keys (bit associated or not, key operating mode, assignment by CCX17…) and send it using internal words (%MWi) as intermediaries to display them on a CCX17 console screen. This is the role of the
ASSIGN_KEYS function.
Data to send parameter coding
Meaning Word number
1
The table below shows the significance of the different words which constitute the following parameter: Data to send (12 words).
2 contains a marker of value 16#CC17,
If a PLC carries out the assignment… this word contains the list of keys to configure. Each command key is coded on a bit (0: non configured, 1: configured): l bit i (i = 1 to 8) command key no. 1.
the following two words indicate the operating mode of each of the command keys. Each key is coded by two bits l l l l
00: Reset,
01: functioning mode on edge,
10: toggle functioning mode,
11: no action.
Bits 2j,2j+1 = command key i+1 (i = 0 to 11) the following eight words contain, accordingly: l l a value –1 when the command keys are not affected, the index of the internal bits affected by the command keys
Word i = command key i (i = 1 to 8)
If a CCX 17 carries out the assignment… this word contains 16#F000 the values of the following ten words are indifferent and will be ignored by the CCX 17 console.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
347
Appendices
Example of use The example below shows the values corresponding to the word table %MW0:16
(data to send) of the ASSIGN_KEYS (ADR#0.0.4,%MW0:16,%MW100:4) function;
Comment Word number
%MW0
%MW1
%MW2
%MW3
%MW4
%MW5
%MW6 to
%MW15
Value
10 rc
-1
16#CC17
16#000F
16#FF09
16#00FF
Marker
Command keys 1 to 4 are configured, the others are not.
Key 1 in edge mode (01), key 2 in toggle mode (02), keys 3 and 4 inhibited (00), the others not programmed (11)
Key 1 affected by bit %M10
Key 1 affected by bit %M11
Keys 3 to 8 not affected
348
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Appendices
Generic send command: PANEL_CMD function
Introduction It is possible to manage different command types (clearing, printing) and to send them by using internal words (%MWi) as intermediaries. This is the role of the
PANEL_CMD function.
Data to send parameter coding
Meaning
1
2
Word number
The table below shows the significance of the different words which constitute the following parameter: Data to send (3 words maximum).
3 contains a marker of value 16#CC17, contains the command number: l l l l l l l l
1: clear screen,
2: clear a line,
9: print the alarm message log,
10: clear the alarm message log,
11: print the alarm log
13: clear the alarm log,
29: clear the alarm (from 1 to 300) destined for CCX 17,
30: clear the alarm (from 900 to 999) destined for the PLC.
indicates the command parameter.
l l l clear line = line number, cancel alarm = alarm number, other commands: no object.
Example of use The example below shows the values corresponding to the word table %MW0:2
(data to send) for the PANEL_CMD(ADR#0.0.4,%MW0:2,%MW100:4) function;
Value Comment Word number
%MW0
%MW1
16#CC17
1
Marker
Clear screen
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
349
Appendices
350
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Process control functions
VI
At a Glance
Overview
What's in this part?
This Part gives you information on the process control functions on Micro PLCs and describes how to install them using PL7 Micro, Junior and Pro software.
This Part contains the following Chapters:
Chapter
29
30
31
32
33
Chaptername
General on the PID
Description of the regulation functions
Operator dialogue on CCX 17
Example of application
Appendices
Page
351
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Process control functions
352
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
General on the PID
29
Introduction
Aim of this chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter introduces the standard regulation functions of the PL7 software.
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
General introduction
Principal of the regulation loop
Development methodology of a regulation application
Page
353
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
General on the PID
General introduction
General The regulation functions are the standard elements of the PL7 language.
They support programming of the regulation loops of the Micro and Premium PLC’s.
These functions are particularly adapted to: l answering the needs of the sequential process which need the auxiliary adjustment functions (examples: Plastic film packaging machine, finishing treatment machine, presses…), l respond to the needs of the simple adjustment process’ (examples: metal furnaces, ceramic furnaces, small refrigerating groups…), l respond to the automatic control features or to the mechanical regulation which has a critical sampling time (examples: torque regulation, speed regulation).
A pre-configured interface with the CCX_17 range supports the driving and the adjustment of the regulation loops. In this area, up to 9 regulation loops are accessible via the CCX_17.
Available functions
Note: There is not a limit to the number of PID functions that are available in a function. In practice, it is the maximum number of input and output modules which are accepted by the PLC that limits the number of loops.
The standard regulation functions are split into two categories: l a family of algorithm functions: l l
PID function to execute a mixed PID correction (serial – parallel),
PWM function to execute the modulation adjustment period on the discrete l l outputs,
SERVO function to execute the motor command adaptations, an operator dialogue function (PID_MMI) which integrates a driving and adjustment application for the PID application on CCX_17 version 2.
The PID_MMI function is linked to 3 types of pre-configured screens.
354
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
General on the PID
Principal of the regulation loop
Introduction
Illustration l l
The working of a regulation loop has three distinct phases: l the acquisition of data and of: l l measurements from the process’ sensors (analog, encoders), setpoint(s) generally from PLC internal variables or from data from the
CCX_17.
execution of the PID regulation algorithm, the sending of orders adapted to the characteristics of the actuators to be driven via the discrete or analog outputs.
The PID algorithm generates the command signal from: l l l the measurement sampled by the input nodule, the setpoint value fixed by either the operator or the program, the values of the different corrector parameters.
The signal from the corrector is either directly handled by an analog output card of the PLC linked to the actuator, or handled via the PWM or SERVO adjustments in function with the kinds of actuator to be driven on a PLC discrete output card.
The following diagram schematizes the principal of a regulation loop.
Operator dialogue desk
CCX 17
Corrector
PLC
Adapter
Process to order
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
355
General on the PID
Development methodology of a regulation application
Diagram of the principal
The following diagram describes the linking of tasks to be carried out during the creation and debugging of a regulation application.
Note: The defined order is given for information only.
Application / Configuration
Configuration of interfaces
Discrete, Analog, Counts
Application / Data
Input data
constant, mnemonic,
numerical values
Programming: Ladder, List
MAST, FAST, SR
Regulation functions,
Operator dialogue
Animation tables
Variable table
PLC /Connector
Transfer of the application
in the PLC
Debugging
program
and adjustment
Debugging
by the CCX 17
356
File / Save
Storing of
the application
Documentation
Application
folder
Operating
the regulation
loops
Operating
the process via the
CCX 17
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Description of the regulation functions
30
Introduction
Aim of this chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter describes the regulation functions.
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
Programming a regulation function
PID Function
Programming the PID function
PWM Function
Programming the PWM function
SERVO Function
Programming the SERVO function
Performance of the functions in the operating mode
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
357
Description of the regulation functions
Programming a regulation function
Programming rules
The regulation function parameters must all be informed. The functions use 3 kinds l l l of parameters: read only parameters, considered at the beginning of the function’s execution, write only parameters, positioned at the conclusion of the function’s execution, the read and write only parameters, whose contents are considered at the beginning of the function’s execution, are then updated by the results of the function.
Note: The regulation functions must be programmed in a periodic task (MAST periodic or FAST). They must not be conditioned.
Parametering The word type input parameters are the analog sizes expressed in the scale [0,
+10000] and can be directly connected to measurement sensors via the words
%IWxy.i des analog inputs.
The bit type output parameters support ordering discrete actuators and can be directly connected to the %Qxy.i. type variables.
In the same way, the word type output parameters support ordering of analog actuators on the scale [0, +10000] and can be directly appointed to the %QWxy.i. type variables.
The MWi:L word table type parameters regroup the user parameters and the data necessary to the internal working of the function.
If the length of a table is sufficient, the function is not executed.
Note: In order to keep the adjustment parameters of the OF adjustment on cold start, it is necessary to delete the %MWi reset to zero option (in the processor’s configuration screen).
358
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Description of the regulation functions
PID Function
General
Available functions
The PID function completes a PID correction via an analog measurement and setpoint on the [0-10000] format and provides an analog command to the same format.
The PID OF is composed of the following functions: l l l l l l l l l serial / parallel PID algorithm, forward / backward action (according to the KP gain sign), action derived from measurement or from distance, high and low limitation of the setpoint to [0-10000], high and low limitation of the output in automatic mode, anti-saturation of the integral action,
Manual/Automatic operating modes without definitely changing,
PID access control through the dialog operator, operating in integrator for (KP = TD =0).
l l
Note:
The display parameters used by the CCX 17 are shown in physical units,
For a correct PID operation, you must stay within the scale of [0-1000] for the measurement and the setpoint.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
359
Description of the regulation functions
Operating principles
The following diagram presents the operating principle of the PID function.
TS
CORRECTOR P.I.D
.
TI
The Setpoint branch
INTERNAL
SETPOINT
SET POINT
S.P
INTERNAL
MEASUREM
PROCESS
VALUE
P.V
10000
Limiter
0
Deviation Integrated
+
SETPOINT
USED
-
MEASUREMENT
USED
ε
0
1
Derivative action
Action derived on the measurement
PV_DEV
TD
d
dt
Derived
+
The PID action
The Measurement branch
+
+
KP
OUT_MAX
Limiter
OUT_MIN
The PID operation modes
1
AUTO
0
OUTP
OUT_MAN
Followed without repeated command attempts on Auto – Manu >switching
DIALOGUE OPERATOR CCX 17
- PV_MMI - PV_SUP
- SP_MMI - PV_INF
Note: The description of the parameters used is presented in the (See Programming
the PID function, p. 361) module.
360
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Description of the regulation functions
Programming the PID function
At a Glance PID functions are standard PL7 functions. They are therefore available from the function library.
This means that it is possible, by working with the language editors, to use assisted entry for a PID function in order to facilitate programming.
Note: A PID function can be entered in any periodic task (MAST or FAST). The function must not be subject to any conditions.
Illustration The illustration below shows the Functions screen in the library which can be used to implement the PID function.
EF
Function Information: Parameters
Family
Orphee function
Timer functions
GRAFCET
Single precision reals
Process control
Integer tables
Call format
V.Bib V.App
2.10
2.00
1.00
2.22
2.01 2.01
2.10
-
-
-
-
-
PID
Name
PID_MMI
PWM
SERVO
Mixed PID controller
Management of dedicated HMI on CCX17 for PIDs
Pulse Width Modulation of a numerical value
PID output stage for discrete valve control
FUNCTION parameters:
Name Type Nature
TAG STRING IN
UNIT STRING
PV WORD
IN
IN
OUT WORD OUT
Comment
Label of PID (8 char.), used by the HMI on CCX17
Unit of measurement (6 char.), used by the HMI>>
Process variable, format [0; +10000]
Output, format [0; +10000]
“TEMP”
Comment
“DEGRES”
%MW10
%MW11
Entry field
Display the call
PID ( “TEMP”,”DEGRES”,%MW10,%MW11,TRIG_PROD_A,%MW20:43 )
Syntax The call syntax for the PID function is:
PID(TAG,UNIT,PV,OUT,AUTO,PARA)
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
361
Description of the regulation functions
Parameters of the PID function
The table below shows the different parameters of the PID function.
Parameter Type Nature
IN = Input
OUT =
Output
TAG IN 8 characters (maximum) or
%MBi:L where L is less than or equal to 8
UNIT
PV
6 characters (maximum) or
%MBi:L where L is less than or equal to 6
%MWi or %IWxy.i.j
IN
IN
Default value
Description
-
-
-
Name used for the PID used by the CCX 17.
Unit of measure for the PID used by the CCX
17.
OUT
AUTO
PARA
%MWi or %QWxy.i.j
%Mi , %Ixy.i or %Qxy.i
%MWi:43
OUT
IN / OUT
IN / OUT -
0
0
Input representing the process variable for the function.
Analog output of the PID.
If TI = 0, an offset of 5000 is added to the OUT output in Auto mode.
Operating mode of the PID and the CCX 17.
0: manual, 1 = Auto.
(See table below for details of PARA table).
The table below shows the different parameters of the PARA table:
Parameter
SP
OUT_MAN
KP
TI
TD
TS
Position
%MWi
%MW(i+1)
%MW(i+2)
%MW(i+3)
%MW(i+4)
%MW(i+5)
Function
Internal setpoint in 0/10000 format
Value of the manual output of the PID (between
0 and 10000)
Proportional gain of the PID (x100), with sign and without units (-10000<KP<+10000). The sign of
Kp determines the direction in which the PID acts
(negative: direct, positive: reverse)
Integral time of the PID (between 0 and 20000) expressed in 10
-1
seconds
Derivative time of the PID (between 0 and 10000) expressed in 10
-1
seconds
Sampling period of the PID (between 1 and
32000) expressed in 10
-2
seconds The actual sampling period will be a multiple of the task period in which the PID closest to TS is located
362
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Parameter
OUT_MAX
OUT_MIN
PV_DEV
NO_BUMP
DEVAL_MMI
PV_SUP (CCX 17)
PV_INF (CCX 17)
PV_MMI (CCX17)
SP_MMI (CCX 17)
Position
%MW(i+6)
%MW(i+7)
%MW(i+8):X0
%MW(i+8):X4
%MW(i+8):X8
%MW(i+9)
%MD(i+11)
%MD(i+13)
%MD(i+15)
Description of the regulation functions
Function
Upper limit of the PID output in auto mode.
(between 0 and 10000)
Lower limit of the PID output in auto mode.
(between 0 and 10000)
Derivative action chosen 0 = on process variable,
1 = on deviation
Bump or bumpless mode.
0 = bumps, 1 = no bumps
= 1 : inhibits acknowledgment of the PID by the
Human Machine Interface.
= 0 : the PID is used by the Human Machine
Interface.
This bit makes it possible to avoid having to carry out scale conversions on PIDs not being used by the CCX_17, and to select the PIDs being used, particularly when there are more than 9 PIDs in the PL7 application.
Upper limit of the process variable scale, in physical units (x100) (between -9 999 999 and +
9 999 999).
Lower limit of the process variable scale, in physical units (x100) (between -999 999 and + 9
999 999).
Image of the process variable in physical units
(x100)
Operator setpoint and image of the setpoint, in physical units (x100)
Note: l The other parameters used for internal management of the PID must never be modified by the application.
l The values used by the CCX 17 are multiplied by 100 so that they can be shown with 2 figures after the decimal point on the CCX 17 (the CCX 17 does not use floating point format but supports a fixed decimal point format).
363
Description of the regulation functions
Rules There is no alignment of the internal setpoint to the process variable in manual mode.
Scaling is only performed when one of the setpoints is modified (SP or DOP_SP).
The algorithm without integral action (TI = 0) performs the following operation:
The output is ...
For
ε t = SP – PV
Where ...
Dt= action dérivée
The algorithm with integral action (TI <0) performs the following operation:
For
ε t = SP – PV
The output is ...
∆
OUT = KP [
∆ε ε ∆
Dt]/100 OUT
= OUT +
∆
OUT
Where ...
Dt= action dérivée
On cold start, the PID resumes in manual, with the output at 0. To impose automatic mode or a manual input not at zero after a cold start, you must program the initialization sequence after the PID call.
364
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Examples
Description of the regulation functions
The examples provided below are in Ladder language.
Where the process control Human Machine Interface is used (DEVAL_MMI = 0)
(* PID correction on temperature process control loop *)
OPERATE
PID(‘TEMP’,’DEGRES’,%MW10,%MW1>> with PID(‘TEMP’,’DEGRES’,%MW10,%MW11,%M10,%MW20:43)
Where no Human Machine Interface is used DEVAL_MMI = 1.
(* PID correction on process control loop without built-in HMI
OPERATE
PID(‘ ’,’ ’,%MW10,%MW1>> with PID(‘ ’,’ ’,%IW3.1,%QW4.0,%M10,%MW20:43)
Note: In this example, the TAG and UNIT parameters are not applicable, so you can simply enter the values.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
365
Description of the regulation functions
PWM Function
General
Operating principles
The PWM function supports regulation of a pulse width on a TOR output. It is a function that formats the PID’s output.
The pulse width depends on the PID’s output (The PWM function’s INP input) and the modulation period.
The circuit diagram of the function’s operation is as follows:
PV
PID OUTP INP
PWM PW_O
SP
T_MOD
Note: The description of the parameters used is presented in the (See Programming
the PWM function, p. 368) module.
366
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Pulse widths
Description of the regulation functions
To each TOP of the T_MOD modulation period, the activation period in 10
-3
second of the PW_O output is calculated according to the following formula:
State 1 of the gap (shown in 10
-2
seconds) = INP * T_MOD / 1000
The following timing diagram illustrates this formula:
PW_O
Modulation period
50% 75% 35%
Time
Width of pulse
Practical rules T_MOD = TS (where TS is the sampling period of the upstream PID),
The period of the current task (expressed in 10
-3
second) is equal to:
(Required resolution)* 10 * T_MOD .
The PID is in the MAST task, the MAST’s period is 50*10
-3
s, TS = 500*10
-2
s and the required resolution is 1/50 (a T_MOD period must contain at least 50 periods of the current task).
T_MOD = TS = 500.
The period of the task where the PWM is introduced must therefore be less than 500
* 10 /50 =100 10
-3
s.
The PWM function can therefore be programmed in the MAST task. the resolution will be 1/100.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
367
Description of the regulation functions
Programming the PWM function
Introduction The PWM function is a standard PL7 function. As such, it is available from the functions library.
From the language editors there, it is possible to use the help of a PWM function’s input to facilitate its programming.
Note: The PWM function’s input can be done in any periodic task (MAST or FAST).
The function does not have to be conditioned.
Illustration The illustration below gives you a general idea of the Functions screen in the library supporting the implementation of the PWM function.
EF
Information Functions: Parameters
Family
Orphee Function
Stalling functions
GRAFCET
Single precision reals
Process Control
Integer tables
Call format
Lib.V App.V.
2.10
2.00
1.00
2.22
2.01 2.01
2.10
-
-
-
-
-
PID
Name
PID_MMI
PWM
SERVO
Mixed PID regulator
Comment
Management of operator dialogue dedicated to CCX17 from
Pulse width modulation of a numerical size
PID output stage for open/close valve order
Parameters of the FUNCTION:
Name Type
INP
PARA
WORD
PW_O EBOOL
AR_W
Kind Comment
IN Numerical size to modulate
OUT Discrete output cyclic report equal to the LESS than value
IN/OUT PWM parameters (5 word table)
%MW11
%Q6.3
%MW90:5
Entry field
Call display
PWM ( %MW11,%Q6.3,%MW90:5 )
Syntax The PWM function’s call syntax is:
PWM(INP,PW_0,PARA)
368
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Description of the regulation functions
The table below presents the different parameters of the PWM function. Parameters of the PWM function
Parameter Type Description
INP
PW_0
PARA
%MWi
%Qxy.i ou %Mi
%MWi:5
Kind
IN = Input
OUT = Output
IN
OUT
IN / OUT
Analog value to be modulated in the pulse width (format [0 – 10000])
Logic output (TOR) whose aspect ratio is the image of the INP input
Modulation period shown in 1/100ths of seconds (between 0 and 32767). T_MOD must be more than or equal to the current task’s period and it is adjusted by the system to be a whole multiple of this.
Table of 5 words whose first word corresponds to the T_MOD parameter.
The following are used internally by the function and must never be modified by the application
Examples The example offered below is done in Ladder language.
(* PID furnace regulation *)
OPERATE
PID(‘FOUR’,’DEGRES’,%IW4.0,%MW>>
(* Alignment of the T_MOD (PWM) on the TS of the PID *)
OPERATE
%MW90:=%MW105
(* Discrete output command in period modulation *)
OPERATE
PWM(%MW11,%Q6.3,%MW90:5) with PID(‘FOUR’,’DEGRES’,%IW4.0,%MW11,%M10,%MW100:43)
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
369
Description of the regulation functions
SERVO Function
General The SERVO function supports regulation with a motor type actuator steered by 2 alternating actions (UP and DOWN).
Note: It must be connected in tandem with the analog output of a PID. It cannot be used alone.
When there is a copy of a position, the valve’s position is locked via the INP
(setpoint) and POT (position measurement) inputs.
When the copy does not physically exist, the algorithm no longer uses the PID’s absolute output but the output’s variation. The UP output (or DOWN, according to the variation sign) is put at 1 for a length of time proportional to the actuator opening time and to the variation of the value. Also the notion of minimum pulse time is introduced.
Principle of operating with a position copy
The SERVO function locks the motor’s position according to a setpoint of the INP position from a PID’s output on the [0-10000] format, and to a POT position measurement.
The locking algorithm is a relay with hysteresis.
In this case, the PID, T_MOTOR and T_MINI parameters are not used.
SERVO
PV
UP
OUTP INP
PID
+
SP
-
DOWN
POT HYST
Note: The description of the parameters used is presented in the (See
Programming the SERVO function, p. 374) module.
370
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Principle of operating without a position copy
(POT= -10000)
Description of the regulation functions
In this case the SERVO function synchronizes itself with the upstream PID via the bias of the PID parameters table, passed in parameter to the SERVO function.
The algorithm receives in input the PID’s variation output and converts it into pulse period, according to the following formula:
T_IMP (shown in 10
-3
s) = OUT x T_MOTOR / 1000
The acquired period adds itself to the remaining period of the preceding cycles: in fact, what is not "consumed" in a cycle is memorized for the following cycles. This ensures a smooth operation especially with sudden variations of the (ex: PID setpoint level) command and in manual mode.
Note: The description of the parameters used is presented in the (See
Programming the SERVO function, p. 374) module.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
371
Description of the regulation functions
Example The example offered below is done in Ladder language.
+20%
+2%
+2%
+24%
OUT
1 2 3 4 5
+22%
UP
DOWN
5 s 1 s
1 s
T_MOTOR = 25 s
T_MINI = 1 s
Caption:
1.
The PID variation output is of +20% (T_MOTOR pulse =25 s for a 100% variation), in this case the pulse affects the UP output for a period of 5 s,
2.
The PID variation is of +2%, which would correspond to a pulse of 0.5 s. This pulse is less than T_MINI (=1 s.), and it does not affect the outputs,
3.
A second variation of +2% appears and the function holds this variation concurrently with the preceding one (which corresponded to a variation less than the minimal value) for its calculation, which corresponds to a positive global variation of
+4%, and therefore to a pulse of 1 s on the UP output,
4.
A variation of –24% appears and the activated pulse is therefore of 6 s on the
DOWN output,
5.
Before the following second, another variation of +22% brings the system back to a global variation of 2% < to the variation of T_MINI (4%). The function finishes carrying out the minimal pulse of 1 s.
Note 1: The SERVO function does not manage the position limits, these must be managed by the application. If a limit is detected, you must force the output corresponding to 0 (UP for the high limit, DOWN for the low limit).
372
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Description of the regulation functions
Example: (done in Ladder language)
(* Management of limits *)
Limit_up
Limit_down
OPERATE
SERVO(Outp,%IW3.1,%Q2.1,%Q2.1,%Q2.2,%M>>)
%Q2.1
R
%Q2.2
R
Note 2: Passing to the operating mode with copy to the mode without copy is possible (for example: when the copy has an error, go to mode without copy).
373
Description of the regulation functions
Programming the SERVO function
Introduction The SERVO function is a standard PL7 function. As such, it is available from the functions library.
From the language editors there, it is possible to use the help of a SERVO function’s input to facilitate its programming.
Note: The SERVO function’s input can be done in any periodic task (MAST or
FAST). The function does not have to be conditioned.
Illustration The illustration below gives you a general idea of the Functions screen in the library supporting the implementation of the SERVO function.
EF
Information Functions: Parameters
Family
Single precision reals
Process Control
Integer tables
Bit tables
Integer tables
Integer tables
Call format
Lib.V App.V.
2.22
2.01
2.00
2.00
2.10
2.00
-
-
-
-
-
-
PID
Name
PID_MMI
PWM
SERVO
Mixed PID regulator
Management of operator dialogue dedicated to CCX17 from PID
Modulated in the pulse width of a numerical size
PID output stage for open/close valve order
Parameters of the PROCEDURE:
Name Type
INP WORD
Kind Comment
Position setpoint, format [0;10000] (to conn>>
POT
UP
DOWN
WORD
EBOOL
EBOOL
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
Position copy, format [0;10000] [-10000>>
Alternating output, UP operating direction
Alternating output, DOWN operating direction
OUTP
-10000
%Q2.1
Comment
%MW100:43
Entry field
Call display
SERVO ( OUTP,-10000,%Q2.1,%MW100:43,%MW180:10 )
Syntax The SERVO function’s call syntax is:
SERVO(INP,POT,UP,DOWN,PID,PARA)
374
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Description of the regulation functions
Parameters of the SERVO function
Parameter
INP
POT
UP
DOWN
PID
PARA
The table below presents the different parameters of the SERVO function.
Type
%MWi
%MWi or direct
%Qxy.i or %Mi bit type %Q or
%M
%MWi:43
Kind
IN = Input
OUT = Output
IN
Description
IN
OUT
OUT
IN / OUT
Position setpoint ([0 – 10000] format) that has to be connected to the PID output.
Position copy, ([0 - 10000] format)
0 : closed valve; 10000: open valve.
If the copy does not exist. POT must be initialized at –10000.
This particular value indicates "no copy".
Output signal for the motor’s UP operating direction.
Output signal for the motor’s DOWN operating direction.
%MWi:10 IN / OUT
The PARA parameter table of the upstream PID. Used if there are no copy words for the synchronization with the upstream
PID. See
Parameters of the PID function, p. 362 .
(See the table below for the breakdown of the PARA table).
The table below presents the different parameters of the PARA table:
Parameter
T_MOTOR
T_MINI
HYST
Position
%MWi
%MW(i+1)
%MW(i+2)
Function
Valve opening time shown in 10
-2
s.
Used if the copy does not exist (POT = -10000).
Minimal pulse time shown in 10
-2
s.
Used if the copy does not exist (POT = -10000).
Value of the hysteresis on the [0 – 10000] format.
Used if the copy does not exist (POT: [0 - 10000]).
Note: l The other parameters that are used by the function’s internal management must never be modified by the application.
l All the parameters are obligatory, regardless of the operating mode.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
375
Description of the regulation functions
Examples The examples offered below are done in Ladder language.
Case with a position copy.
OPERATE
PID(‘PID1’,’m/s’,PV,OUTP,MAN_AUTO>> with PID(‘PID1’,’m/s’,PV,OUTP,MAN_AUTO,%MW100:43)
OPERATE
PID(‘TEMP’,’DEGRES’,%MW10,%MW1>> with SERVO(OUTP,%IW3.1,%Q2.1,%Q2.2,%MW100:43,%MW180:10)
Case without a position copy.
OPERATE
PID(‘PID1’,’m/s’,PV,OUTP,MAN_AUTO>> with PID(‘PID1’,’m/s’,PV,OUTP,MAN_AUTO,%MW100:43)
OPERATE
PID(‘TEMP’,’DEGRES’,%MW10,%MW1>> with SERVO(OUTP,-10000,%Q2.1,%Q2.2,%MW100:43,%MW180:10)
376
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Description of the regulation functions
Performance of the functions in the operating mode
Introduction
Cold start
Warm restart
This paragraph describes the performance of the functions in different starting l l l cases: cold start (new application, change of cartridge…), warm restart (power return without changing the application context), first execution after adding a function via modification in connected mode.
This type of start occurs for a new application or a change of cartridge.
On a cold start, the PLC can start automatically in RUN (according to the application’s configuration). The function correctors have a security performance: manual mode, outputs at 0. In addition, this supports the switching of the PLC into
RUN mode without carrying out the PID adjustment, then its debugging with the
CCX 17 (the adjustment can only be done in RUN).
This type of restart occurs for a power return, without changing the application context.
With a power return after an outage (regardless of how long it lasted) and if the application context is not lost or modified, the functions go back to their state before the outage. If the user wants to use another performance, it is his responsibility to test the %S1 system bit and to associate the required processing to it (forcing in manual mode…).
Note: The PLC’s time-and-date stamp allows you find out the duration of the last outage.
Adding a new call in connected mode
Following the addition of a new function regulation call in connected mode, an identical initialization to the case of the cold start is carried out.
Note: In order to be seen as a new function, this must use a new parameter table.
Therefore, the removal of a PID, followed by adding a PID that uses the same parameter table is not considered as an addition of a new PID. In this case the PID is executed in the same state and with the same parameters as the preceding PID.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
377
Description of the regulation functions
378
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Operator dialogue on CCX 17
31
Introduction
Aim of this chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter presents the operator dialogue on CCX 17.
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
Dialog operator on the CCX 17
Selecting a loop
Controlling a loop
Adjusting a loop
PID_MMI Function: programming
Performance of the PID_MMI function according to the PLC and CCX 17’s operating modes
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
379
Operator dialogue on CCX 17
Dialog operator on the CCX 17
Introduction The CCX 17 permits viewing and control of all the modifiable parameters of a PID corrector without having to program a specific aplication.
The dialog operator function integrates a control and adjustment application on the
CCX 17 application’s PIDs. It provides management of 3 types of screens on the
CCX 17 supporting selection of a PID, viewing and controlling of this PID and adjusting the parameters of the PID. It inserts itself easily into any dialog operator application on the CCX 17.
Note: This function is only effective if the PLC is in RUN.
Limitations There is no limit to the number of PIDs in the application. On the other hand, a maximum of 9 PIDs are accessible via the dialog operator function on the CCX 17-
30 and on the CCX 17-30.
Navigating from one screen to another is done via the CCX’s command buttons and within screens via the up and down arrow buttons. The navigation offered is a
"vertical" navigation. You must always return to the loop selection screen to gain access to the values of other correctors.
The display is done over 4 lines (8 lines with the CCX 17-30) with the messages in
40 characters.
380
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Operator dialogue on CCX 17
What the keys do
Position of the keys
Fixed messages
Functions
The MOD key supports switching from display mode to input mode (in this case, the selected value starts flashing).
On the same screen, the input mode remains active for all the fields and pressing MOD again allows you to exit the input mode (stopping the flashing).
In input mode, the modification of a parameter is acknowledged by pressing the ENTER key.
MOD ENTER
Set up principle Setting up the dialog operator is easy: l l the PID_MMI function(s) are started at each cycle (non-conditioned call), a single call to the PID_MMI function manages all the application’s PIDs.
However, a call from the PID_MMI function via CCX_17, which is connected to the PLC is necessary, l detection of the application’s PIDs via the PID_MMI function is automatic, including when adding or removing in RUN. Therefore there is no declaration to l do,
Identification of the required corrector is done via the "TAG" parameter from the
PID function and its selection depends on the value of the function’s
"DEVAL_MMI" parameter. (Only acknowledged via the PID_MMI function, the
PIDs whose DEVAL_MMI parameter is = 0).
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
381
Operator dialogue on CCX 17
Selecting a loop
Introduction
Selection screen
Display
Ex
Rf
The number of PIDs operated by the CCX 17s is a maximum of 9 loops, regardless of the number of connected CCX 17s.
Ex 1 : TEMPERA
4 : FURNACE
7 : TANK
2 : DEBIT1 3 : DEBIT2
5 : LEVEL
8 : HOPPER
6 : BOILER
9 : MIXER
Rf LOOP SELECT : 0
Functions
This screen displays all the labels implemented in the
PL7.
A figure is associated to each label (from 1 to 9 maximum).
To control a loop, the operator must input the corresponding number.
After inputting the loop number, the loop controlling screen is displayed.
Pressing the Exit (Ex) button allows you to leave the regulation screens.
Pressing the Refresh (Rf) button allows you to refresh the screen. This operation must be performed after deleting or adding loops via the PL7 in connected mode.
Note: If the application has no accessible PID via the CCX 17 (whether there is no
PID in the application, or the PID’s existing DEVAL_MMIs are all at 1), the "NO
PID" message is displayed. The Exit and Refresh buttons keep their functions.
382
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Operator dialogue on CCX 17
Controlling a loop
Introduction
Selection screen
Display
This screen supports control over the setpoint, command and Manual/Auto mode values. The PV_INF and PV_SUP values are also displayed and controlable via this screen and they allow you to set the scale of the measurement in physical units.
Up
Dn
Up FURNACE AUTO
Dn
PV
SP
OUT
: 66,00 units
: 51,50
: 45,00
SUP : 100,00
INF : 100,00
Functions
The Manual/Auto screen is highlighted. Every time you press the associated command button you switch from one mode to the other.
In automatic mode, controlling an output is not authorized.
You can switch from one input field to another by using the up and down arrow keys. The operating mode is as follows: as soon as the screen is displayed, it is the SP value which is selected (highlighted), then using the down arrow button, OUT (if manual), LESS and MORE.
Pressing MOD supports switching into input mode (press
MOD again to exit it).
The Dn button gives access to the adjustment screen and to return to the loop selection screen use the UP button.
(the PV, SP, OUT, LESS and MORE values are displayed as integers with 2 significant figures after the comma).
PV, SP, LESS and MORE are in physical units. OUT is in percentage.
Note: When a field is flashing (input mode), the value is not refreshed in case of modification by the application or the PL7.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
383
Operator dialogue on CCX 17
Adjusting a loop
Introduction This screen supports adjustment of the PID parameters (KP, TI, TD, TS) as well as the output limits OUT_MIN and OUT_MAX.
Selection screen
Display
Up Up
TI(s)
Ts(s)
OUT_MIN
FURNAC
E
KP
TD(s)
PV_DEV
OUT_MAX : 0,0
: 1,0
: -20,00
: 1,00
: 0,0
0
: 20,00
Functions
You can switch from one input field to another by using the up and down arrow keys.
As soon as the screen is displayed, the KP value is displayed (highlighted).
The KP parameter has no unit. TI, TD and TS are in seconds. OUT_MIN and OUT_MAX are in percentage.
Pressing the Up button returns you to the loop controlling screen.
Note: When a field is flashing (input mode), the value is not refreshed in case of modification by the application or the PL7.
384
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Operator dialogue on CCX 17
PID_MMI Function: programming
Introduction The PID_MMI function supports establishment of the dialog with the PLCs to which the CCX 17 is connected. A PID_MMI function is necessary via CCX 17 for the steering, the display and the adjustment of the application’s PIDs.
The PID_MMI function is a standard PL7 function. As such, it is available from the functions library.
From the language editors there, it is possible to use the help of a PID_MMI function’s input to facilitate its programming.
Note: Inputting a PID_MMI function must be done in the task with the slowest period containing PIDs (MAST or FAST). The function does not have to be conditioned.
Example: An application with: l a FAST task at 10*10
-3
s containing PIDs, l a MAST task at 50*10
-3
s containing PIDs, the PID_MMI function must therefore be programmed in the MAST task.
Illustration The illustration below gives you a general idea of the Functions screen in the library supporting the implementation of the PID_MMI function.
EF DFB
Information Functions: Parameters
Family
Orphee Function
Stalling functions
GRAFCET
Single precision reals
Process Control
Integer tables
Call format
Lib.V App.V.
2.10
2.00
1.00
2.22
2.10
-
-
-
-
2.01 2.01
-
PID
PWM
Name
PID_MMI
SERVO
Parameters of the FUNCTION:
Name
ADDR
Type
AR_W
EN EBOOL
BUTT AR_X
PARA AR_Y
Kind
IN
Comment
Topological address of the destination CCX17 [ta>>
IN/OUT Activation of DOP on CCX17
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
5 bit table linked to the command buttons>>
PID_MMI parameters [62 word table]
Comment
Mixed PID regulator
Management of operator dialogue dedicated to CCX17 from PID
Modulated in the pulse width of a numerical size
PID output stage for open/close valve order
ADR#0.0.4
%M1
%M10:5
%MW45:62
Entry field
Call display
PID_MMI ( ADR#0.0.4,%M1,%MW10:5,%MW45:62 )
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
385
Operator dialogue on CCX 17
Syntax
Parameters of the PID_MMI function
The PID_MMI function’s call syntax is:
PID_MMI (ADDR, EN, BUTT, PARA)
The table below presents the different parameters of the PID_MMI function.
Parameter
ADDR
EN
Type Kind
IN = Input
OUT = Output
Description
%MWi:6 IN
%Mi IN / OUT
CCX 17’s address
Activation of the regulation operator dialog.
The application puts this bit to 1 and the PID_MMI function puts it back to 0 when you exit the regulation operator dialog (press Ex)
BUTT
PARA
%Mi:5
%MWi:62
IN / OUT
IN / OUT
Bits associated to the CCX 17 buttons.
These bits allow you to drive different screens as well as Manual/Auto.
Parameters of the PID_MMI.
The first 4 are the words of the communication report.
Note: The 4 words of the report are the same as in all the asynchronous communication functions (communication OF, integrated OF DOP and OF
PID_MMI). However the OF PID_MMI automatically manages these words and the application never has to modify them. They are provided for information.
For more information, refer to the Dialog operator (See Operator Dialog functions,
Example of the CCX 17:
If the CCX 17 is connected directly to the PLC’s (UNI-TELWAY) AUX socket, it is at the UNI-TELWAY 4-5 slave addresses.
The coding can be done: l via immediate value: PID_MMI(ADR#{0.254}0.0.4,....) or simply:
PID_MMI(ADR#0.0.4,....), l via a table of 6 words: %MW10:6 := ADR#0.0.4 PID_MMI(%MW10:6,...).
Synchronization of the dialog operator
The CCX 17 can be used to show screens other than the regulation screens. The IN bit is there to activate/deactivate the regulation dialog operator.
Setting IN to 1 activates the regulation operator dialog and is displayed on the PIDs’ selection screen.
386
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Examples
Operator dialogue on CCX 17
The examples offered below are done in Ladder language.
%MI is associated to the IN bit (display switch on the operator). The alarm management application is always activated, just like the regulation operator dialog.
(*Management of display communication on the CCX 17*)
%M1
%L1
(*DOP application for the display of screens relative to PL7 *)
P
OPERATE
SEND_MSG(ADR#0.0.4,%KW20.6,%MW30:5)
(*DOP application for the display of adjustment screens *)
OPERATE
PID_MMI(ADR#0.0.4,%M1,%M10:5,%MW45:62)
(*Exchange flag bit calculation in progress *)
%MW45:X0 MSG_in_progress
%MW200:X0 error ala_900
R
(*Send alarm upon error appearance *) error MSG_in_progress %M1 OPERATE
SEND_ALARM(ADR#0.0.4,%KW140:29,%MW200:4) ala_900
S rz_ala_900
R
(* Cancellation of the alarm if it is sounded *) ala_900 rz_ala_900 OPERATE
PANEL_CMD(ADR#0.0.4,%KW170:3,%MW200:4) rz_ala_900
S
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
387
Operator dialogue on CCX 17
Management of the command buttons
When the PID_MMI is activated (IN at 1), it assigns the CCX 17 command buttons.
If the application uses these buttons for anything but regulation, they must be reassigned on the falling edge of IN (using the ASSIGN_KEYS function described in the DOP (See
Operator Dialog functions, p. 271)).
On the other hand, if the CCX 17 is only for regulation, it is advised that you carry out a non-conditioned SET of the IN bit in the application.
Selection of the
PIDs managed by the PID_MMI function
Each PID possesses a bit type DEVAL_MMI parameter. If this bit is at 1, the PID is not managed by PID_MMI. It is the only available level of protection. Moreover, if the application has more than 9 PIDs, it is the way to master those that are handled by the PID_MMI.
Alarm management
It is up to the user to program his/her own alarm management. This overlays itself on the management of the regulation screens.
If an alarm (coming from the dialog operator’s application) goes off while one of the
3 regulation screens is displayed, the CCX_17 is then dedicated to managing the alarm messages. When you return to the regulation operator dialog, the screen appears incomplete. Up/Dn or Refresh allows you to refresh this screen.
Several PID_MMI functions
It is possible to connect several CCX 17 terminals to the same PLC, so it can be useful to have several PID_MMI in the same application.
In this case, the different PID_MMI must be executed consecutively (no integrated
PID call) via the same PL7 task.
388
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Operator dialogue on CCX 17
Performance of the PID_MMI function according to the PLC and CCX 17’s operating modes
Introduction
Warm start l l l
This paragraph describes the performance of the PID_MMI function according to the different operating modes of the PLC and the CCX 17: warm restart, crossing into Run or Stop, reconnecting to the CCX 17.
This type of restart occurs for a power return, without changing the application context.
If a problem such as a micro-outage on the PLC occurs while sending a message, the command is not repeated. It is therefore necessary to reinitialize the dialog by activating the IN bit via the application program.
STOP/RUN and
RUN/STOP crossing
In STOP, the PID_MMI function is no longer active. Nevertheless, you can still output parameters belonging to the displayed screen.
In STOP/RUN, the function goes back to the state it was in before crossing into
STOP.
Power outage or reconnecting to the CCX 17
With a power return or reconnection to the CCX 17, this reinitializes the communication with the PLC. Periodically, the PID_MMI reassigns the CCX 17’s command buttons. So after 20 seconds or more, pressing one of the first 3 buttons will display one of the regulation screens (preferably the Ref or Dn button on the left of the second row).
Note: Via the application, it is also possible to detect the presence of the CCX 17 by using the language words associated to the communication channels and to manage the dialog reset via the IN bit.
Cold start It is only on a cold start that the regulation screens are reset.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
389
Operator dialogue on CCX 17
390
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Example of application
32
Introduction
Aim of this chapter
What's in this
Chapter?
This chapter presents an example of application.
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
Description of the application example
Configuration of the example
Programming the example
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
391
Example
Description of the application example
Context This is about maintaining the water temperature of an open air swimming pool at a required value. This value itself is determined according to the ambient air temperature.
Air Temp.
TT
Water Temp
Measure
Reheater
Regul
Output
Setpoint calcualation Setpoint
Pump
A discrete regulation is generally used in this type of installation. It is suggested that in this example, you substitute it for a proportional regulation with a modulated output, which should support reduction in the size of the temperature oscillations around the required value.
Temperature required
Output
Discrete regulation Proportional regulation
T_CYCL
Measuring the water temperature as well as the ambient temperature is done using a Pt 100 resistance thermometer.
392
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Example
The setpoint of the water temperature depends on the exterior temperature according to the below law:
Temperature of the water
30°C
24°C
5°C
35°C
Temperature outside l l l l
A HIGH TEMPERATURE alarm will go off if the water temperature exceeds 32°C,
A LOW TEMPERATURE alarm will go off if it falls below 22°C,
A REGULATION ERROR alarm will go off if the SETPOINT/MEASUREMENT gap exceeds 2°C in either direction,
The regulation will become inoperative (output at 0) in case the pump stops.
393
Example
Configuration of the example
Hardware configuration
This application uses: l l l a TSX 37-10 PLC a TSX DMZ 28DTK discrete I/O module.
a TSX AEZ 414 analog input module,
The configuration is thus as follows:
1 5 7 0
TSX
3710
3
AEZ
414
DMZ
28DTK
Assignment
2 4 6 8
The discrete output %Q2.0 is assigned to the control the reheater.
The discrete output %Q2.1 is assigned to the control the pump.
The discrete outputs %Q2.2, %Q2.3 and %Q2.4 are assigned to alarms.
The bit %M0 is used to select the process controller operating mode AUTO/MANU.
The discrete inputs %I1.1 and %I1.2 are used to modify the setpoint value in AUTO l l mode and the output value in MANU mode according to the following algorithm:
%I1.1 = 1 increase of 0.1 % per cycle,
%I1.2 = 1 decrease of 0.1 % per cycle.
The input %I1.3 supplies information on the state of the pump.
The input %I1.4 is used to control the pump.
The input %I1.6 controls the display on the CCX 17.
%IW3.0 to %IW3.3 are the values of the analog inputs.
394
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Example
Diagram of the process control loop
PID process controller action is in the INVERSE direction (an increase in the process value must correspond to a decrease in the output value).
PID1
PWM
Water temperature
Air temperature
Motor overheating
control
Reheater overheating control
Sonde
Pt100
Sonde
Pt100
Th J
Th K
TSX AEZ 414
%IW3.0
%IW3.1
%IW3.2
%IW3.3
Setpoint calculation
Mes
Set
+
-
PID
OUT
AUTO
MANU
To the heating resistance %Q4.0
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
395
Example
Configuration Rack configuration
1
2
Slot
0
3
Family
Processors
Discrete Inputs
Discrete Outputs
Analog
Product reference
TSX 3710
TSX DMZ 28DTK
TSX AEZ 414
Channel parameters for TSX DMZ 28DTK module
1
2
Channel Type of channel Address
0 Input %I1.0
Input
Input
%I1.1
%I1.2
5
6
3
4
Input
Input
Input
Input
7 to 16 Inputs not used
%I1.3
%I1.4
%I1.5
%I1.6
Symbol
-
CONSIG_INCREM
CONSIG_DECREM
ETAT_POMPE
ACT_POMPE
-
VALID_DOP_REG
Task
MAST
MAST
MAST
MAST
MAST
MAST
MAST
0
1
2
Output
Output
Output
%Q2.0
%Q2.1
%Q2.2
COMM_RECHAUF
COMM_POMPE
ALARM_TEMP_HAU
T
MAST
MAST
MAST
ALARM_TEMP_BAS MAST
ALARM_DEF_REG MAST
3
4
Output
Output
5 to 12 Outputs not used
%Q2.3
%Q2.4
Channel parameters for TSX AEZ 414 module
Range Scale Min.
0
1
Chann el
2
3
Address Symbol
%IW3.0
%IW3.1
%IW3.2
%IW3.3
TEMP_EAU
TEMP_AIR
SURCHAUF
_MOTEUR
SURCHAUF
_RECHAUF
Pt100
Pt100
Thermo J
%..
%..
%..
Thermo K %..
0
-200
0
0
Max.
Unit
500
800
°C
°C
1000 °C
1000 °C
Filtering Task
0
0
0
0
MAST
MAST
MAST
MAST
396
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Bit
Internal (%M): 256
System (%S): 128
Configuration of bits, words and function blocks
Words
Internal (%MB,%MW,%MD,%MF): 512
System (%SW,%SD): 128
Common (%NW): 0
Constant (%KB,%KW,%KD,%KF): 128
Function blocks
Series 7 timer(s) (%T): 0
Timer(s) (%TM): 64
Monostable(s) (%MN): 4
Counter(s) (%C): 32
Register(s) (%R): 4
Drum(s) (%DR): 2
Example
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
397
Example
Programming the example
Proposed processing method
The block PID1 is assigned to temperature process control. The temperature setpoint is calculated on the basis of the ambient temperature.
On reconnection to the mains, the process control operating mode is selected and the pump is started.
The state of the controller is conditioned by the operating state of the pump. If the pump is faulty the PID switches to MANU and the output is forced to 0.
The status word bits (process value high threshold, process value low threshold, deviation high threshold and deviation low threshold) are used to generate alarms.
The PID loop coefficients will be initialized to: l l l
KP = 600
TI = 300
TD = 50
The display on the CCX is as follows: l l
KP = 6
TI = 30 l TD = 5
These values can of course be fine-tuned during a subsequent adjustment phase.
398
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
MAST-MAIN
Example
(*Initialization of constants on cold restart-> PID loop buffer and initialization of PWM period to 10 s*)
%LO
%SW10:XO OPERATE
%MW10:10:=%KW10:10
OPERATE
%MW55:=1000
(*Pump activation *)
%L1O
%I1.4
%Q2.1
(* PID loop controller operating mode management. This program allows the CCX17 to modify the A/M bit *)
%L11
%I1.3
P
%I1.3
N
OPERATE
%MW11:=0
(* Initialization of water temperature setpoint to 27 °C *)
OPERATE
%MW10:=5400
%M10
S
%M10
R
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
399
Example
(* Execution of the temperature process control loop *)
%L12
OPERATE
(1)
OPERATE
PWM(%MW53,%Q2.0,%MW55:5)
(* Management of process value alarms *)
%L15
COMPARE
%IW3.0>6400
COMPARE
%IW3.0<4400
(* Management of deviation alarms *)
%L16
OPERATE
(%MW60:=%IW3.0-%MW10)
COMPARE
%MW60>400
COMPARE
%MW60<-400
%Q2.2
%Q2.3
%Q2.4
400
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
(* PID loop controller on CCX17 *)
%L20
OPERATE
PID_MMI(ADR#0.0.4,%I1.6,%MO:5,%MW100/62)
%I1.6
S
Example
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
401
Example
402
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Appendices
33
At a Glance
Overview
What's in this
Chapter?
This Chapter reviews several aspects of the process control application.
This Chapter contains the following Maps:
Topic
PID parameter adjustment method
Role and influence of PID parameters
Page
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
403
Appendices
PID parameter adjustment method
Introduction
Closed loop adjustment
Numerous methods to adjust the PID parameters exist, we suggest Ziegler and
Nichols which have two variants: l l closed loop adjustment, open loop adjustment.
Before implementing one of these methods, you must set the PID action direction: l if an increase in the OUT output causes an increase in the PV measurement, make the PID inverted (KP > 0), l on the other hand, if this causes a PV reduction, make the PID direct (KP < 0).
This principal consists of using a proportional command (Ti = 0, Td = 0 ) to start the process by increasing production until it starts to oscillate again after having applied a level to the PID corrector setpoint. All that is required is to raise the critical production level (Kpc) which has caused the non damped oscillation and the oscillation period (Tc) to reduce the values giving an optimal regulation of the regulator.
Measure
404
Tc time
According to the kind of (PID or PI) regulator, the adjustment of the coefficients is executed with the following values:
-
PID
PI
Kp
Kpc/1,7
Ti
Tc/2
Kpc/2,22 0,83 x Tc -
Td
Tc/8 where Kp = proportional production, Ti = integration time and TD = diversion time.
Note: This adjustment method provides a very dynamic command which can express itself through unwanted overshootsduring the change of setpoint pulses.
In this case, lower the production value until you get the required behaviour.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Open loop adjustment
Appendices
As the regulator is in manual mode, you apply a level to the output and make the procedure response start the same as an integrator with pure delay time. .
Output
S
Measure
Integrator Process response t
M = S
Tu Tg t
The intersection point on the right hand side which is representative of the integrator with the time axes, determines the time Tu. Next, Tg time is defined as the time necessary for the controlled variable (measurement) to have the same variation size
(% of the scale) as the regulator output.
According to the kind of (PID or PI) regulator, the adjustment of the coefficients is executed with the following values:
-
PID
PI
Kp
-1,2 Tg/Tu
-0,9 Tg/Tu
Ti
2 x Tu
3,3 x Tu
Td
0,5 x Tu
where Kp = proportional production, Ti = integration time and TD = diversion time.
Note: Attention to the units. If the adjustment is carried out in PL7, multiply the value obtained for KP by 100.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
405
Appendices
This adjustment method also provides a very dynamic command, which can express itself through unwanted overshoots during the change of setpoints’ pulses. In this case, lower the production value until you get the required behavior. The method is interesting because it does not require any assumptions about the nature and the order of the procedure. You can apply it just as well to the stable procedures as to real integrating procedures. It is really interesting in the case of slow procedures
(glass industry,…) because the user only requires the beginning of the response to regulate the coefficients Kp, Ti and Td.
406
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Appendices
Role and influence of PID parameters
Influence of proportional action
Proportional action is used to influence the process response speed. The higher the gain, the faster the response, and the lower the static error (in direct proportion), though the more stability deteriorates. A suitable compromise between speed and stability must be found. The influence of integral action on process response to a scale division is as follows:
Kp too high
Kp correct
°C
Static error
Kp too low
Influence of integral action t
Integral action is used to cancel out static error (deviation between the process value and the setpoint). The higher the level of integral action (low Ti), the faster the response and the more stability deteriorates. It is also necessary to find a suitable compromise between speed and stability. The influence of integral action on process response to a scale division is as follows:
Ti too high
Ti correct
C
Ti too low
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
407
Appendices
Note: A low Ti means a high level of integral action.
where Kp = proportional gain, Ti = integration time and Td = derivative time.
Influence of derivative action
Derivative action is anticipatory. In practice, it adds a term which takes account of the speed of variation in the deviation, which makes it possible to anticipate changes by accelerating process response times when the deviation increases and by slowing them down when the deviation decreases. The higher the level of derivative action (high Td), the faster the response. A suitable compromise between speed and stability must be found. The influence of derivative action on process response to a scale division is as follows:
Td too high
C
Td too low
Td correct t
408
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Appendices
Limits of the PID control loop
If the process is assimilated to a pure delay first order with a transfer function:
( )
= K
(
(
1
( ) p
+
θ p
)
) where:
τ
=model delay,
θ = model time constant,
100%
Measure = M
0
+ ∆ M
∆ M
Measure = M
0
τ θ t
The process control performance depends on the ratio
τ
The suitable PID process control is attained in the following domain: 2- -20
τ
θ delay (high t) the PID process control is no longer suitable. In such cases more complex algorithms should be used.
τ
For >20, a process control using a threshold plus hysterisis is sufficient.
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
409
Appendices
410
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Glossary
A
AS-interface Actuator Sensor interface
C
CCX17
Channel group
CPU
Family of Schneider Automation Human-Machine Interface terminal
Channels of the same type with common parameters. This notion concerns certain application-specific modules such as discrete modules.
Central Processing Unit: generic name used for Schneider Automation processors
D
Discrete Discrete I/Os
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
411
Glossary
F
FIPIO
I
IP67
Field bus used to connect sensor or actuator type devices.
Family of Schneider Automation hardware products consisting of sealed I/O modules which connect to the FIPIO field bus, used to produce automated systems with distributed I/Os.
M
Momentum
P
PL7
PV
I/O modules using several open standard communication networks.
Schneider Automation PLC programming software.
Identifier indicating the product version.
T
TBX I/O modules remoted on the FIPIO bus.
TSX/PMX/PCX57 Families of Schneider Automation hardware products.
412
TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE
Index
Symbols
A
Accessing the configuration editor, 56
Adding a profile
Adding a slave
Addressing
Addresssing
Adjustment objects
Advanced operation
Alarm output
TLX DS 37 PL7 xx
Application-specific function, 65
Application-specific instructions, 52
AS-i slave
Automatic slave addressing
B
Built-in application-specific interfaces, 27
C
Command objects
Confirming the configuration, 60, 61
Connecting
413
Index
D
Debug function
Debug screen
Declaration of an I/O module, 59
Device connection
Diag
Diagnostics mode
E
Event on a falling edge
Event on a rising edge
Event processing
Evti
Explicit exchange
414
External errors
F
Fallback mode
Fallback to 0
Family
Fault processing by program, 62
Faulty slave
Filtering time
Function
Functions
G
I
Implicit exchange
TLX DS 37 PL7 xx
L
Language objects, 107, 108, 109, 151, 152
Latching
M
Maintain
Maintain outputs
Maintain state
Master/Slave
Module diagnostics
Module fault
Module selection
N
Network frequency
O
Offline mode
Operating mode
Operating modes of the dialog operator, 389
TLX DS 37 PL7 xx
P
Performance
Process control functions, 351
Profile
Protected mode
R
Reactivation of outputs
Reading adjustment parameters, 40
Restoring adjustment parameters, 44
RUN/STOP input
S
Save program and % MW input
Saving adjustment parameters, 42
Selection of modules
Index
415
Index
Slave configuration
Slave number
Slaves
Slaves’ status
Software installation
Status objects
Structure of an AS-i slave
T
Task
Tripped output
TSX SAZ 10
TSX SAZ 10 module
Type of inputs
U
W
416
Writing adjustment parameters, 41
TLX DS 37 PL7 xx
Letöltés
A nyilvános link frissítve
A csevegés nyilvános linkje frissítve lett. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Dokumentum nyilvános linkje
Hirdetés